Search Results

Search found 39751 results on 1591 pages for 'add'.

Page 400/1591 | < Previous Page | 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407  | Next Page >

  • while running mvn jetty:run showing the following error ..

    - by munna
    C:\source\myprojectmvn jetty:run [INFO] Scanning for projects... [INFO] ------------------------------------------------------------------------ [INFO] Building AppFuse Spring MVC Application [INFO] task-segment: [jetty:run] [INFO] ------------------------------------------------------------------------ [INFO] Preparing jetty:run [WARNING] POM for 'xfire:xfire-jsr181-api:pom:1.0-M1:compile' is invalid. Its dependencies (if any) will NOT be available to the current build. [INFO] [warpath:add-classes {execution: default}] [INFO] [aspectj:compile {execution: default}] [INFO] [native2ascii:native2ascii {execution: native2ascii-utf8}] [INFO] [native2ascii:native2ascii {execution: native2ascii-8859_1}] [INFO] [resources:resources {execution: default-resources}] [WARNING] File encoding has not been set, using platform encoding Cp1252, i.e. b uild is platform dependent! [WARNING] Using platform encoding (Cp1252 actually) to copy filtered resources, i.e. build is platform dependent! [INFO] Copying 12 resources [INFO] Copying 1 resource [INFO] Copying 26 resources [INFO] Copying 26 resources [INFO] [compiler:compile {execution: default-compile}] [INFO] Nothing to compile - all classes are up to date [INFO] [resources:testResources {execution: default-testResources}] [WARNING] File encoding has not been set, using platform encoding Cp1252, i.e. b uild is platform dependent! [WARNING] Using platform encoding (Cp1252 actually) to copy filtered resources, i.e. build is platform dependent! [INFO] Copying 4 resources [INFO] Copying 9 resources [INFO] Preparing hibernate3:hbm2ddl [WARNING] Removing: hbm2ddl from forked lifecycle, to prevent recursive invocati on. [INFO] [warpath:add-classes {execution: default}] [INFO] [aspectj:compile {execution: default}] [INFO] [native2ascii:native2ascii {execution: native2ascii-utf8}] [INFO] [native2ascii:native2ascii {execution: native2ascii-8859_1}] [INFO] [resources:resources {execution: default-resources}] [WARNING] File encoding has not been set, using platform encoding Cp1252, i.e. b uild is platform dependent! [WARNING] Using platform encoding (Cp1252 actually) to copy filtered resources, i.e. build is platform dependent! [INFO] Copying 12 resources [INFO] Copying 1 resource [INFO] Copying 26 resources [INFO] Copying 26 resources [INFO] Copying 26 resources [INFO] Copying 26 resources [INFO] [hibernate3:hbm2ddl {execution: default}] [INFO] Configuration XML file loaded: file:/C:/source/myproject/src/main/resourc es/hibernate.cfg.xml [INFO] Configuration XML file loaded: file:/C:/source/myproject/src/main/resourc es/hibernate.cfg.xml [INFO] Configuration Properties file loaded: C:\source\myproject\target\classes\ jdbc.properties alter table user_role drop foreign key FK143BF46A4FD90D75; alter table user_role drop foreign key FK143BF46AF503D155; drop table if exists app_user; drop table if exists role; drop table if exists user_role; create table app_user (id bigint not null auto_increment, account_expired bit no t null, account_locked bit not null, address varchar(150), city varchar(50) not null, country varchar(100), postal_code varchar(15) not null, province varchar(1 00), credentials_expired bit not null, email varchar(255) not null unique, accou nt_enabled bit, first_name varchar(50) not null, last_name varchar(50) not null, password varchar(255) not null, password_hint varchar(255), phone_number varcha r(255), username varchar(50) not null unique, version integer, website varchar(2 55), primary key (id)) ENGINE=InnoDB; create table role (id bigint not null auto_increment, description varchar(64), n ame varchar(20), primary key (id)) ENGINE=InnoDB; create table user_role (user_id bigint not null, role_id bigint not null, primar y key (user_id, role_id)) ENGINE=InnoDB; alter table user_role add index FK143BF46A4FD90D75 (role_id), add constraint FK1 43BF46A4FD90D75 foreign key (role_id) references role (id); alter table user_role add index FK143BF46AF503D155 (user_id), add constraint FK1 43BF46AF503D155 foreign key (user_id) references app_user (id); [INFO] [compiler:testCompile {execution: default-testCompile}] [INFO] Nothing to compile - all classes are up to date [INFO] [dbunit:operation {execution: test-compile}] [INFO] [jetty:run {execution: default-cli}] [INFO] Configuring Jetty for project: AppFuse Spring MVC Application [INFO] Webapp source directory = C:\source\myproject\src\main\webapp [INFO] web.xml file = C:\source\myproject\src\main\webapp\WEB-INF\web.xml [INFO] Classes = C:\source\myproject\target\classes [INFO] Adding extra scan target from pattern: C:\source\myproject\src\main\webap p\WEB-INF\applicationContext-validation.xml [INFO] Adding extra scan target from pattern: C:\source\myproject\src\main\webap p\WEB-INF\applicationContext.xml [INFO] Adding extra scan target from pattern: C:\source\myproject\src\main\webap p\WEB-INF\dispatcher-servlet.xml [INFO] Adding extra scan target from pattern: C:\source\myproject\src\main\webap p\WEB-INF\menu-config.xml [INFO] Adding extra scan target from pattern: C:\source\myproject\src\main\webap p\WEB-INF\urlrewrite.xml [INFO] Adding extra scan target from pattern: C:\source\myproject\src\main\webap p\WEB-INF\validation.xml [INFO] Adding extra scan target from pattern: C:\source\myproject\src\main\webap p\WEB-INF\validator-rules-custom.xml [INFO] Adding extra scan target from pattern: C:\source\myproject\src\main\webap p\WEB-INF\validator-rules.xml [INFO] Adding extra scan target from pattern: C:\source\myproject\src\main\webap p\WEB-INF\web.xml 2010-06-02 15:13:28.921::INFO: Logging to STDERR via org.mortbay.log.StdErrLog [INFO] Context path = / [INFO] Tmp directory = determined at runtime [INFO] Web defaults = org/mortbay/jetty/webapp/webdefault.xml [INFO] Web overrides = none [INFO] Webapp directory = C:\source\myproject\src\main\webapp [INFO] Starting jetty 6.1.9 ... 2010-06-02 15:13:28.983::INFO: jetty-6.1.9 2010-06-02 15:13:28.248::INFO: No Transaction manager found - if your webapp re quires one, please configure one. 2010-06-02 15:13:28.482:/:INFO: Initializing Spring root WebApplicationContext [myproject] ERROR [main] ContextLoader.initWebApplicationContext(215) | Context initialization failed org.springframework.beans.factory.BeanDefinitionStoreException: IOException pars ing XML document from ServletContext resource [/WEB-INF/xfire-servlet.xml]; nest ed exception is java.io.FileNotFoundException: Could not open ServletContext res ource [/WEB-INF/xfire-servlet.xml] at org.springframework.beans.factory.xml.XmlBeanDefinitionReader.loadBea nDefinitions(XmlBeanDefinitionReader.java:349) at org.springframework.beans.factory.xml.XmlBeanDefinitionReader.loadBea nDefinitions(XmlBeanDefinitionReader.java:310) at org.springframework.beans.factory.support.AbstractBeanDefinitionReade r.loadBeanDefinitions(AbstractBeanDefinitionReader.java:143) at org.springframework.beans.factory.support.AbstractBeanDefinitionReade r.loadBeanDefinitions(AbstractBeanDefinitionReader.java:178) at org.springframework.beans.factory.support.AbstractBeanDefinitionReade r.loadBeanDefinitions(AbstractBeanDefinitionReader.java:149) at org.springframework.web.context.support.XmlWebApplicationContext.load BeanDefinitions(XmlWebApplicationContext.java:124) at org.springframework.web.context.support.XmlWebApplicationContext.load BeanDefinitions(XmlWebApplicationContext.java:92) at org.springframework.context.support.AbstractRefreshableApplicationCon text.refreshBeanFactory(AbstractRefreshableApplicationContext.java:123) at org.springframework.context.support.AbstractApplicationContext.obtain FreshBeanFactory(AbstractApplicationContext.java:423) at org.springframework.context.support.AbstractApplicationContext.refres h(AbstractApplicationContext.java:353) at org.springframework.web.context.ContextLoader.createWebApplicationCon text(ContextLoader.java:255) at org.springframework.web.context.ContextLoader.initWebApplicationConte xt(ContextLoader.java:199) at org.springframework.web.context.ContextLoaderListener.contextInitiali zed(ContextLoaderListener.java:45) at org.mortbay.jetty.handler.ContextHandler.startContext(ContextHandler. java:540) at org.mortbay.jetty.servlet.Context.startContext(Context.java:135) at org.mortbay.jetty.webapp.WebAppContext.startContext(WebAppContext.jav a:1220) at org.mortbay.jetty.handler.ContextHandler.doStart(ContextHandler.java: 510) at org.mortbay.jetty.webapp.WebAppContext.doStart(WebAppContext.java:448 ) at org.mortbay.jetty.plugin.Jetty6PluginWebAppContext.doStart(Jetty6Plug inWebAppContext.java:110) at org.mortbay.component.AbstractLifeCycle.start(AbstractLifeCycle.java: 39) at org.mortbay.jetty.handler.HandlerCollection.doStart(HandlerCollection .java:152) at org.mortbay.jetty.handler.ContextHandlerCollection.doStart(ContextHan dlerCollection.java:156) at org.mortbay.component.AbstractLifeCycle.start(AbstractLifeCycle.java: 39) at org.mortbay.jetty.handler.HandlerCollection.doStart(HandlerCollection .java:152) at org.mortbay.component.AbstractLifeCycle.start(AbstractLifeCycle.java: 39) at org.mortbay.jetty.handler.HandlerWrapper.doStart(HandlerWrapper.java: 130) at org.mortbay.jetty.Server.doStart(Server.java:222) at org.mortbay.component.AbstractLifeCycle.start(AbstractLifeCycle.java: 39) at org.mortbay.jetty.plugin.Jetty6PluginServer.start(Jetty6PluginServer. java:132) at org.mortbay.jetty.plugin.AbstractJettyMojo.startJetty(AbstractJettyMo jo.java:357) at org.mortbay.jetty.plugin.AbstractJettyMojo.execute(AbstractJettyMojo. java:293) at org.mortbay.jetty.plugin.AbstractJettyRunMojo.execute(AbstractJettyRu nMojo.java:203) at org.mortbay.jetty.plugin.Jetty6RunMojo.execute(Jetty6RunMojo.java:184 ) at org.apache.maven.plugin.DefaultPluginManager.executeMojo(DefaultPlugi nManager.java:490) at org.apache.maven.lifecycle.DefaultLifecycleExecutor.executeGoals(Defa ultLifecycleExecutor.java:694) at org.apache.maven.lifecycle.DefaultLifecycleExecutor.executeStandalone Goal(DefaultLifecycleExecutor.java:569) at org.apache.maven.lifecycle.DefaultLifecycleExecutor.executeGoal(Defau ltLifecycleExecutor.java:539) at org.apache.maven.lifecycle.DefaultLifecycleExecutor.executeGoalAndHan dleFailures(DefaultLifecycleExecutor.java:387) at org.apache.maven.lifecycle.DefaultLifecycleExecutor.executeTaskSegmen ts(DefaultLifecycleExecutor.java:348) at org.apache.maven.lifecycle.DefaultLifecycleExecutor.execute(DefaultLi fecycleExecutor.java:180) at org.apache.maven.DefaultMaven.doExecute(DefaultMaven.java:328) at org.apache.maven.DefaultMaven.execute(DefaultMaven.java:138) at org.apache.maven.cli.MavenCli.main(MavenCli.java:362) at org.apache.maven.cli.compat.CompatibleMain.main(CompatibleMain.java:6 0) at sun.reflect.NativeMethodAccessorImpl.invoke0(Native Method) at sun.reflect.NativeMethodAccessorImpl.invoke(NativeMethodAccessorImpl. java:39) at sun.reflect.DelegatingMethodAccessorImpl.invoke(DelegatingMethodAcces sorImpl.java:25) at java.lang.reflect.Method.invoke(Method.java:597) at org.codehaus.classworlds.Launcher.launchEnhanced(Launcher.java:315) at org.codehaus.classworlds.Launcher.launch(Launcher.java:255) at org.codehaus.classworlds.Launcher.mainWithExitCode(Launcher.java:430) at org.codehaus.classworlds.Launcher.main(Launcher.java:375) Caused by: java.io.FileNotFoundException: Could not open ServletContext resource [/WEB-INF/xfire-servlet.xml] at org.springframework.web.context.support.ServletContextResource.getInp utStream(ServletContextResource.java:116) at org.springframework.beans.factory.xml.XmlBeanDefinitionReader.loadBea nDefinitions(XmlBeanDefinitionReader.java:336) ... 51 more 2010-06-02 15:13:29.919::WARN: Failed startup of context org.mortbay.jetty.plug in.Jetty6PluginWebAppContext@1ba4806{/,C:\source\myproject\src\main\webapp} org.springframework.beans.factory.BeanDefinitionStoreException: IOException pars ing XML document from ServletContext resource [/WEB-INF/xfire-servlet.xml]; nest ed exception is java.io.FileNotFoundException: Could not open ServletContext res ource [/WEB-INF/xfire-servlet.xml] at org.springframework.beans.factory.xml.XmlBeanDefinitionReader.loadBea nDefinitions(XmlBeanDefinitionReader.java:349) at org.springframework.beans.factory.xml.XmlBeanDefinitionReader.loadBea nDefinitions(XmlBeanDefinitionReader.java:310) at org.springframework.beans.factory.support.AbstractBeanDefinitionReade r.loadBeanDefinitions(AbstractBeanDefinitionReader.java:143) at org.springframework.beans.factory.support.AbstractBeanDefinitionReade r.loadBeanDefinitions(AbstractBeanDefinitionReader.java:178) at org.springframework.beans.factory.support.AbstractBeanDefinitionReade r.loadBeanDefinitions(AbstractBeanDefinitionReader.java:149) at org.springframework.web.context.support.XmlWebApplicationContext.load BeanDefinitions(XmlWebApplicationContext.java:124) at org.springframework.web.context.support.XmlWebApplicationContext.load BeanDefinitions(XmlWebApplicationContext.java:92) at org.springframework.context.support.AbstractRefreshableApplicationCon text.refreshBeanFactory(AbstractRefreshableApplicationContext.java:123) at org.springframework.context.support.AbstractApplicationContext.obtain FreshBeanFactory(AbstractApplicationContext.java:423) at org.springframework.context.support.AbstractApplicationContext.refres h(AbstractApplicationContext.java:353) at org.springframework.web.context.ContextLoader.createWebApplicationCon text(ContextLoader.java:255) at org.springframework.web.context.ContextLoader.initWebApplicationConte xt(ContextLoader.java:199) at org.springframework.web.context.ContextLoaderListener.contextInitiali zed(ContextLoaderListener.java:45) at org.mortbay.jetty.handler.ContextHandler.startContext(ContextHandler. java:540) at org.mortbay.jetty.servlet.Context.startContext(Context.java:135) at org.mortbay.jetty.webapp.WebAppContext.startContext(WebAppContext.jav a:1220) at org.mortbay.jetty.handler.ContextHandler.doStart(ContextHandler.java: 510) at org.mortbay.jetty.webapp.WebAppContext.doStart(WebAppContext.java:448 ) at org.mortbay.jetty.plugin.Jetty6PluginWebAppContext.doStart(Jetty6Plug inWebAppContext.java:110) at org.mortbay.component.AbstractLifeCycle.start(AbstractLifeCycle.java: 39) at org.mortbay.jetty.handler.HandlerCollection.doStart(HandlerCollection .java:152) at org.mortbay.jetty.handler.ContextHandlerCollection.doStart(ContextHan dlerCollection.java:156) at org.mortbay.component.AbstractLifeCycle.start(AbstractLifeCycle.java: 39) at org.mortbay.jetty.handler.HandlerCollection.doStart(HandlerCollection .java:152) at org.mortbay.component.AbstractLifeCycle.start(AbstractLifeCycle.java: 39) at org.mortbay.jetty.handler.HandlerWrapper.doStart(HandlerWrapper.java: 130) at org.mortbay.jetty.Server.doStart(Server.java:222) at org.mortbay.component.AbstractLifeCycle.start(AbstractLifeCycle.java: 39) at org.mortbay.jetty.plugin.Jetty6PluginServer.start(Jetty6PluginServer. java:132) at org.mortbay.jetty.plugin.AbstractJettyMojo.startJetty(AbstractJettyMo jo.java:357) at org.mortbay.jetty.plugin.AbstractJettyMojo.execute(AbstractJettyMojo. java:293) at org.mortbay.jetty.plugin.AbstractJettyRunMojo.execute(AbstractJettyRu nMojo.java:203) at org.mortbay.jetty.plugin.Jetty6RunMojo.execute(Jetty6RunMojo.java:184 ) at org.apache.maven.plugin.DefaultPluginManager.executeMojo(DefaultPlugi nManager.java:490) at org.apache.maven.lifecycle.DefaultLifecycleExecutor.executeGoals(Defa ultLifecycleExecutor.java:694) at org.apache.maven.lifecycle.DefaultLifecycleExecutor.executeStandalone Goal(DefaultLifecycleExecutor.java:569) at org.apache.maven.lifecycle.DefaultLifecycleExecutor.executeGoal(Defau ltLifecycleExecutor.java:539) at org.apache.maven.lifecycle.DefaultLifecycleExecutor.executeGoalAndHan dleFailures(DefaultLifecycleExecutor.java:387) at org.apache.maven.lifecycle.DefaultLifecycleExecutor.executeTaskSegmen ts(DefaultLifecycleExecutor.java:348) at org.apache.maven.lifecycle.DefaultLifecycleExecutor.execute(DefaultLi fecycleExecutor.java:180) at org.apache.maven.DefaultMaven.doExecute(DefaultMaven.java:328) at org.apache.maven.DefaultMaven.execute(DefaultMaven.java:138) at org.apache.maven.cli.MavenCli.main(MavenCli.java:362) at org.apache.maven.cli.compat.CompatibleMain.main(CompatibleMain.java:6 0) at sun.reflect.NativeMethodAccessorImpl.invoke0(Native Method) at sun.reflect.NativeMethodAccessorImpl.invoke(NativeMethodAccessorImpl. java:39) at sun.reflect.DelegatingMethodAccessorImpl.invoke(DelegatingMethodAcces sorImpl.java:25) at java.lang.reflect.Method.invoke(Method.java:597) at org.codehaus.classworlds.Launcher.launchEnhanced(Launcher.java:315) at org.codehaus.classworlds.Launcher.launch(Launcher.java:255) at org.codehaus.classworlds.Launcher.mainWithExitCode(Launcher.java:430) at org.codehaus.classworlds.Launcher.main(Launcher.java:375) Caused by: java.io.FileNotFoundException: Could not open ServletContext resource [/WEB-INF/xfire-servlet.xml] at org.springframework.web.context.support.ServletContextResource.getInp utStream(ServletContextResource.java:116) at org.springframework.beans.factory.xml.XmlBeanDefinitionReader.loadBea nDefinitions(XmlBeanDefinitionReader.java:336) ... 51 more 2010-06-02 15:13:29.152::WARN: Nested in org.springframework.beans.factory.Bean DefinitionStoreException: IOException parsing XML document from ServletContext r esource [/WEB-INF/xfire-servlet.xml]; nested exception is java.io.FileNotFoundEx ception: Could not open ServletContext resource [/WEB-INF/xfire-servlet.xml]: java.io.FileNotFoundException: Could not open ServletContext resource [/WEB-INF/ xfire-servlet.xml] at org.springframework.web.context.support.ServletContextResource.getInp utStream(ServletContextResource.java:116) at org.springframework.beans.factory.xml.XmlBeanDefinitionReader.loadBea nDefinitions(XmlBeanDefinitionReader.java:336) at org.springframework.beans.factory.xml.XmlBeanDefinitionReader.loadBea nDefinitions(XmlBeanDefinitionReader.java:310) at org.springframework.beans.factory.support.AbstractBeanDefinitionReade r.loadBeanDefinitions(AbstractBeanDefinitionReader.java:143) at org.springframework.beans.factory.support.AbstractBeanDefinitionReade r.loadBeanDefinitions(AbstractBeanDefinitionReader.java:178) at org.springframework.beans.factory.support.AbstractBeanDefinitionReade r.loadBeanDefinitions(AbstractBeanDefinitionReader.java:149) at org.springframework.web.context.support.XmlWebApplicationContext.load BeanDefinitions(XmlWebApplicationContext.java:124) at org.springframework.web.context.support.XmlWebApplicationContext.load BeanDefinitions(XmlWebApplicationContext.java:92) at org.springframework.context.support.AbstractRefreshableApplicationCon text.refreshBeanFactory(AbstractRefreshableApplicationContext.java:123) at org.springframework.context.support.AbstractApplicationContext.obtain FreshBeanFactory(AbstractApplicationContext.java:423) at org.springframework.context.support.AbstractApplicationContext.refres h(AbstractApplicationContext.java:353) at org.springframework.web.context.ContextLoader.createWebApplicationCon text(ContextLoader.java:255) at org.springframework.web.context.ContextLoader.initWebApplicationConte xt(ContextLoader.java:199) at org.springframework.web.context.ContextLoaderListener.contextInitiali zed(ContextLoaderListener.java:45) at org.mortbay.jetty.handler.ContextHandler.startContext(ContextHandler. java:540) at org.mortbay.jetty.servlet.Context.startContext(Context.java:135) at org.mortbay.jetty.webapp.WebAppContext.startContext(WebAppContext.jav a:1220) at org.mortbay.jetty.handler.ContextHandler.doStart(ContextHandler.java: 510) at org.mortbay.jetty.webapp.WebAppContext.doStart(WebAppContext.java:448 ) at org.mortbay.jetty.plugin.Jetty6PluginWebAppContext.doStart(Jetty6Plug inWebAppContext.java:110) at org.mortbay.component.AbstractLifeCycle.start(AbstractLifeCycle.java: 39) at org.mortbay.jetty.handler.HandlerCollection.doStart(HandlerCollection .java:152) at org.mortbay.jetty.handler.ContextHandlerCollection.doStart(ContextHan dlerCollection.java:156) at org.mortbay.component.AbstractLifeCycle.start(AbstractLifeCycle.java: 39) at org.mortbay.jetty.handler.HandlerCollection.doStart(HandlerCollection .java:152) at org.mortbay.component.AbstractLifeCycle.start(AbstractLifeCycle.java: 39) at org.mortbay.jetty.handler.HandlerWrapper.doStart(HandlerWrapper.java: 130) at org.mortbay.jetty.Server.doStart(Server.java:222) at org.mortbay.component.AbstractLifeCycle.start(AbstractLifeCycle.java: 39) at org.mortbay.jetty.plugin.Jetty6PluginServer.start(Jetty6PluginServer. java:132) at org.mortbay.jetty.plugin.AbstractJettyMojo.startJetty(AbstractJettyMo jo.java:357) at org.mortbay.jetty.plugin.AbstractJettyMojo.execute(AbstractJettyMojo. java:293) at org.mortbay.jetty.plugin.AbstractJettyRunMojo.execute(AbstractJettyRu nMojo.java:203) at org.mortbay.jetty.plugin.Jetty6RunMojo.execute(Jetty6RunMojo.java:184 ) at org.apache.maven.plugin.DefaultPluginManager.executeMojo(DefaultPlugi nManager.java:490) at org.apache.maven.lifecycle.DefaultLifecycleExecutor.executeGoals(Defa ultLifecycleExecutor.java:694) at org.apache.maven.lifecycle.DefaultLifecycleExecutor.executeStandalone Goal(DefaultLifecycleExecutor.java:569) at org.apache.maven.lifecycle.DefaultLifecycleExecutor.executeGoal(Defau ltLifecycleExecutor.java:539) at org.apache.maven.lifecycle.DefaultLifecycleExecutor.executeGoalAndHan dleFailures(DefaultLifecycleExecutor.java:387) at org.apache.maven.lifecycle.DefaultLifecycleExecutor.executeTaskSegmen ts(DefaultLifecycleExecutor.java:348) at org.apache.maven.lifecycle.DefaultLifecycleExecutor.execute(DefaultLi fecycleExecutor.java:180) at org.apache.maven.DefaultMaven.doExecute(DefaultMaven.java:328) at org.apache.maven.DefaultMaven.execute(DefaultMaven.java:138) at org.apache.maven.cli.MavenCli.main(MavenCli.java:362) at org.apache.maven.cli.compat.CompatibleMain.main(CompatibleMain.java:6 0) at sun.reflect.NativeMethodAccessorImpl.invoke0(Native Method) at sun.reflect.NativeMethodAccessorImpl.invoke(NativeMethodAccessorImpl. java:39) at sun.reflect.DelegatingMethodAccessorImpl.invoke(DelegatingMethodAcces sorImpl.java:25) at java.lang.reflect.Method.invoke(Method.java:597) at org.codehaus.classworlds.Launcher.launchEnhanced(Launcher.java:315) at org.codehaus.classworlds.Launcher.launch(Launcher.java:255) at org.codehaus.classworlds.Launcher.mainWithExitCode(Launcher.java:430) at org.codehaus.classworlds.Launcher.main(Launcher.java:375) 2010-06-02 15:13:29.417::INFO: Started [email protected]:8080 [INFO] Started Jetty Server [INFO] Starting scanner at interval of 3 seconds.

    Read the article

  • Passing data between android ListActivities in Java

    - by Will Janes
    I am new to Android! I am having a problem getting this code to work... Basically I Go from one list activity to another and pass the text from a list item through the intent of the activity to the new list view, then retrieve that text in the new list activity and then preform a http request based on value of that list item. Log Cat 04-05 17:47:32.370: E/AndroidRuntime(30135): FATAL EXCEPTION: main 04-05 17:47:32.370: E/AndroidRuntime(30135): java.lang.ClassCastException:android.widget.LinearLayout 04-05 17:47:32.370: E/AndroidRuntime(30135): at com.thickcrustdesigns.ufood.CatogPage$1.onItemClick(CatogPage.java:66) 04-05 17:47:32.370: E/AndroidRuntime(30135): at android.widget.AdapterView.performItemClick(AdapterView.java:284) 04-05 17:47:32.370: E/AndroidRuntime(30135): at android.widget.ListView.performItemClick(ListView.java:3731) 04-05 17:47:32.370: E/AndroidRuntime(30135): at android.widget.AbsListView$PerformClick.run(AbsListView.java:1959) 04-05 17:47:32.370: E/AndroidRuntime(30135): at android.os.Handler.handleCallback(Handler.java:587) 04-05 17:47:32.370: E/AndroidRuntime(30135): at android.os.Handler.dispatchMessage(Handler.java:92) 04-05 17:47:32.370: E/AndroidRuntime(30135): at android.os.Looper.loop(Looper.java:130) 04-05 17:47:32.370: E/AndroidRuntime(30135): at android.app.ActivityThread.main(ActivityThread.java:3691) 04-05 17:47:32.370: E/AndroidRuntime(30135): at java.lang.reflect.Method.invokeNative(Native Method) 04-05 17:47:32.370: E/AndroidRuntime(30135): at java.lang.reflect.Method.invoke(Method.java:507) 04-05 17:47:32.370: E/AndroidRuntime(30135): at com.android.internal.os.ZygoteInit$MethodAndArgsCaller.run(ZygoteInit.java:907) 04-05 17:47:32.370: E/AndroidRuntime(30135): at com.android.internal.os.ZygoteInit.main(ZygoteInit.java:665) 04-05 17:47:32.370: E/AndroidRuntime(30135): at dalvik.system.NativeStart.main(Native Method) ListActivity 1 package com.thickcrustdesigns.ufood; import java.util.ArrayList; import org.apache.http.NameValuePair; import org.apache.http.message.BasicNameValuePair; import org.json.JSONException; import org.json.JSONObject; import android.app.ListActivity; import android.content.Intent; import android.os.Bundle; import android.view.View; import android.widget.AdapterView; import android.widget.AdapterView.OnItemClickListener; import android.widget.Button; import android.widget.ListView; import android.widget.TextView; public class CatogPage extends ListActivity { ListView listView1; Button btn_bk; @Override public void onCreate(Bundle savedInstanceState) { super.onCreate(savedInstanceState); setContentView(R.layout.definition_main); btn_bk = (Button) findViewById(R.id.btn_bk); listView1 = (ListView) findViewById(android.R.id.list); ArrayList<NameValuePair> nvp = new ArrayList<NameValuePair>(); nvp.add(new BasicNameValuePair("request", "categories")); ArrayList<JSONObject> jsondefs = Request.fetchData(this, nvp); String[] defs = new String[jsondefs.size()]; for (int i = 0; i < jsondefs.size(); i++) { try { defs[i] = jsondefs.get(i).getString("Name"); } catch (JSONException e) { // TODO Auto-generated catch block e.printStackTrace(); } } uFoodAdapter adapter = new uFoodAdapter(this, R.layout.definition_list, defs); listView1.setAdapter(adapter); ListView lv = getListView(); lv.setOnItemClickListener(new OnItemClickListener() { @Override public void onItemClick(AdapterView<?> parent, View view, int position, long id) { TextView tv = (TextView) view; String p = tv.getText().toString(); Intent i = new Intent(getApplicationContext(), Results.class); i.putExtra("category", p); startActivity(i); } }); btn_bk.setOnClickListener(new View.OnClickListener() { public void onClick(View arg0) { Intent i = new Intent(getApplicationContext(), UFoodAppActivity.class); startActivity(i); } }); } } **ListActivity 2** package com.thickcrustdesigns.ufood; import java.util.ArrayList; import org.apache.http.NameValuePair; import org.apache.http.message.BasicNameValuePair; import org.json.JSONException; import org.json.JSONObject; import android.app.ListActivity; import android.os.Bundle; import android.widget.ListView; public class Results extends ListActivity { ListView listView1; enum Category { Chicken, Beef, Chinese, Cocktails, Curry, Deserts, Fish, ForOne { public String toString() { return "For One"; } }, Lamb, LightBites { public String toString() { return "Light Bites"; } }, Pasta, Pork, Vegetarian } @Override public void onCreate(Bundle savedInstanceState) { super.onCreate(savedInstanceState); this.setContentView(R.layout.definition_main); listView1 = (ListView) findViewById(android.R.id.list); Bundle data = getIntent().getExtras(); String category = data.getString("category"); Category cat = Category.valueOf(category); String value = null; switch (cat) { case Chicken: value = "Chicken"; break; case Beef: value = "Beef"; break; case Chinese: value = "Chinese"; break; case Cocktails: value = "Cocktails"; break; case Curry: value = "Curry"; break; case Deserts: value = "Deserts"; break; case Fish: value = "Fish"; break; case ForOne: value = "ForOne"; break; case Lamb: value = "Lamb"; break; case LightBites: value = "LightBites"; break; case Pasta: value = "Pasta"; break; case Pork: value = "Pork"; break; case Vegetarian: value = "Vegetarian"; } ArrayList<NameValuePair> nvp = new ArrayList<NameValuePair>(); nvp.add(new BasicNameValuePair("request", "category")); nvp.add(new BasicNameValuePair("cat", value)); ArrayList<JSONObject> jsondefs = Request.fetchData(this, nvp); String[] defs = new String[jsondefs.size()]; for (int i = 0; i < jsondefs.size(); i++) { try { defs[i] = jsondefs.get(i).getString("Name"); } catch (JSONException e) { // TODO Auto-generated catch block e.printStackTrace(); } } uFoodAdapter adapter = new uFoodAdapter(this, R.layout.definition_list, defs); listView1.setAdapter(adapter); } } Request package com.thickcrustdesigns.ufood; import java.io.BufferedReader; import java.io.InputStream; import java.io.InputStreamReader; import java.util.ArrayList; import org.apache.http.HttpEntity; import org.apache.http.HttpResponse; import org.apache.http.NameValuePair; import org.apache.http.client.HttpClient; import org.apache.http.client.entity.UrlEncodedFormEntity; import org.apache.http.client.methods.HttpPost; import org.apache.http.impl.client.DefaultHttpClient; import org.json.JSONArray; import org.json.JSONObject; import android.content.Context; import android.util.Log; import android.widget.Toast; public class Request { @SuppressWarnings("null") public static ArrayList<JSONObject> fetchData(Context context, ArrayList<NameValuePair> nvp) { ArrayList<JSONObject> listItems = new ArrayList<JSONObject>(); InputStream is = null; try { HttpClient httpclient = new DefaultHttpClient(); HttpPost httppost = new HttpPost( "http://co350-11d.projects02.glos.ac.uk/php/database.php"); httppost.setEntity(new UrlEncodedFormEntity(nvp)); HttpResponse response = httpclient.execute(httppost); HttpEntity entity = response.getEntity(); is = entity.getContent(); } catch (Exception e) { Log.e("log_tag", "Error in http connection" + e.toString()); } // convert response to string String result = ""; try { BufferedReader reader = new BufferedReader(new InputStreamReader( is, "iso-8859-1"), 8); InputStream stream = null; StringBuilder sb = null; while ((result = reader.readLine()) != null) { sb.append(result + "\n"); } stream.close(); result = sb.toString(); } catch (Exception e) { Log.e("log_tag", "Error converting result " + e.toString()); } try { JSONArray jArray = new JSONArray(result); for (int i = 0; i < jArray.length(); i++) { JSONObject jo = jArray.getJSONObject(i); listItems.add(jo); } } catch (Exception e) { Toast.makeText(context.getApplicationContext(), "None Found!", Toast.LENGTH_LONG).show(); } return listItems; } } Any help would be grateful! Many Thanks EDIT Sorry very tired so missed out my 2nd ListActivity package com.thickcrustdesigns.ufood; import java.util.ArrayList; import org.apache.http.NameValuePair; import org.apache.http.message.BasicNameValuePair; import org.json.JSONException; import org.json.JSONObject; import android.app.ListActivity; import android.os.Bundle; import android.widget.ListView; public class Results extends ListActivity { ListView listView1; enum Category { Chicken, Beef, Chinese, Cocktails, Curry, Deserts, Fish, ForOne { public String toString() { return "For One"; } }, Lamb, LightBites { public String toString() { return "Light Bites"; } }, Pasta, Pork, Vegetarian } @Override public void onCreate(Bundle savedInstanceState) { super.onCreate(savedInstanceState); this.setContentView(R.layout.definition_main); listView1 = (ListView) findViewById(android.R.id.list); Bundle data = getIntent().getExtras(); String category = data.getString("category"); Category cat = Category.valueOf(category); String value = null; switch (cat) { case Chicken: value = "Chicken"; break; case Beef: value = "Beef"; break; case Chinese: value = "Chinese"; break; case Cocktails: value = "Cocktails"; break; case Curry: value = "Curry"; break; case Deserts: value = "Deserts"; break; case Fish: value = "Fish"; break; case ForOne: value = "ForOne"; break; case Lamb: value = "Lamb"; break; case LightBites: value = "LightBites"; break; case Pasta: value = "Pasta"; break; case Pork: value = "Pork"; break; case Vegetarian: value = "Vegetarian"; } ArrayList<NameValuePair> nvp = new ArrayList<NameValuePair>(); nvp.add(new BasicNameValuePair("request", "category")); nvp.add(new BasicNameValuePair("cat", value)); ArrayList<JSONObject> jsondefs = Request.fetchData(this, nvp); String[] defs = new String[jsondefs.size()]; for (int i = 0; i < jsondefs.size(); i++) { try { defs[i] = jsondefs.get(i).getString("Name"); } catch (JSONException e) { // TODO Auto-generated catch block e.printStackTrace(); } } uFoodAdapter adapter = new uFoodAdapter(this, R.layout.definition_list, defs); listView1.setAdapter(adapter); } } Sorry again! Cheers guys!

    Read the article

  • Reading data in from file

    - by user667430
    Hi Here is link if you want to download application: Simple banking app Text file with data to read I am trying to create a simple banking application that reads in data from a text file. So far i have managed to read in all the customers which there are 20 of them. However when reading in the accounts and transactions stuff it only reads in 20 but there is alot more in the text file. Here is what i have so far. I think it has something to do with the nested for loop in the getNextCustomer method. using System; using System.Collections; using System.Collections.Generic; using System.ComponentModel; using System.Data; using System.Drawing; using System.IO; using System.Linq; using System.Text; using System.Windows.Forms; namespace e_SOFT_Banking { public partial class Form1 : Form { public static ArrayList bankDetails = new ArrayList(); public static ArrayList accDetails = new ArrayList(); public static ArrayList tranDetails = new ArrayList(); string inputDataFile = @"C:\e-SOFT_v1.txt"; const int numCustItems = 14; const int numAccItems = 7; const int numTransItems = 5; public Form1() { InitializeComponent(); setUpBank(); } private void btnShowData_Click_1(object sender, EventArgs e) { showListsOfCust(); } private void setUpBank() { readData(); } private void showListsOfCust() { listBox1.Items.Clear(); foreach (Customer c in bankDetails) listBox1.Items.Add(c.getCustomerNumber() + " " + c.getCustomerTitle() + " " + c.getFirstName() + " " + c.getInitials() + " " + c.getSurname() + " " + c.getDateOfBirth() + " " + c.getHouseNameNumber() + " " + c.getStreetName() + " " + c.getArea() + " " + c.getCityTown() + " " + c.getCounty() + " " + c.getPostcode() + " " + c.getPassword() + " " + c.getNumberAccounts()); foreach (Account a in accDetails) listBox1.Items.Add(a.getAccSort() + " " + a.getAccNumber() + " " + a.getAccNick() + " " + a.getAccDate() + " " + a.getAccCurBal() + " " + a.getAccOverDraft() + " " + a.getAccNumTrans()); foreach (Transaction t in tranDetails) listBox1.Items.Add(t.getDate() + " " + t.getType() + " " + t.getDescription() + " " + t.getAmount() + " " + t.getBalAfter()); } private void readData() { StreamReader readerIn = null; Transaction curTrans; Account curAcc; Customer curCust; bool anyMoreData; string[] customerData = new string[numCustItems]; string[] accountData = new string[numAccItems]; string[] transactionData = new string[numTransItems]; if (readOK(inputDataFile, ref readerIn)) { anyMoreData = getNextCustomer(readerIn, customerData, accountData, transactionData); while (anyMoreData == true) { curCust = new Customer(customerData[0], customerData[1], customerData[2], customerData[3], customerData[4], customerData[5], customerData[6], customerData[7], customerData[8], customerData[9], customerData[10], customerData[11], customerData[12], customerData[13]); curAcc = new Account(accountData[0], accountData[1], accountData[2], accountData[3], accountData[4], accountData[5], accountData[6]); curTrans = new Transaction(transactionData[0], transactionData[1], transactionData[2], transactionData[3], transactionData[4]); bankDetails.Add(curCust); accDetails.Add(curAcc); tranDetails.Add(curTrans); anyMoreData = getNextCustomer(readerIn, customerData, accountData, transactionData); } if (readerIn != null) readerIn.Close(); } } private bool getNextCustomer(StreamReader inNext, string[] nextCustomerData, string[] nextAccountData, string[] nextTransactionData) { string nextLine; int numCItems = nextCustomerData.Count(); int numAItems = nextAccountData.Count(); int numTItems = nextTransactionData.Count(); for (int i = 0; i < numCItems; i++) { nextLine = inNext.ReadLine(); if (nextLine != null) { nextCustomerData[i] = nextLine; if (i == 13) { int cItems = Convert.ToInt32(nextCustomerData[13]); for (int q = 0; q < cItems; q++) { for (int a = 0; a < numAItems; a++) { nextLine = inNext.ReadLine(); nextAccountData[a] = nextLine; if (a == 6) { int aItems = Convert.ToInt32(nextAccountData[6]); for (int w = 0; w < aItems; w++) { for (int t = 0; t < numTItems; t++) { nextLine = inNext.ReadLine(); nextTransactionData[t] = nextLine; } } } } } } } else return false; } return true; } private bool readOK(string readFile, ref StreamReader readerIn) { try { readerIn = new StreamReader(readFile); return true; } catch (FileNotFoundException notFound) { MessageBox.Show("ERROR Opening file (when reading data in)" + " - File could not be found.\n" + notFound.Message); return false; } catch (Exception e) { MessageBox.Show("ERROR Opening File (when reading data in)" + "- Operation failed.\n" + e.Message); return false; } } } } I also have three classes one for customers, one for accounts and one for transactions, which follow in that order. using System; using System.Collections.Generic; using System.Linq; using System.Text; namespace e_SOFT_Banking { class Customer { private string customerNumber; private string customerTitle; private string firstName; private string initials; //not required - defaults to null private string surname; private string dateOfBirth; private string houseNameNumber; private string streetName; private string area; //not required - defaults to null private string cityTown; private string county; private string postcode; private string password; private int numberAccounts; public Customer(string theCustomerNumber, string theCustomerTitle, string theFirstName, string theInitials, string theSurname, string theDateOfBirth, string theHouseNameNumber, string theStreetName, string theArea, string theCityTown, string theCounty, string thePostcode, string thePassword, string theNumberAccounts) { customerNumber = theCustomerNumber; customerTitle = theCustomerTitle; firstName = theFirstName; initials = theInitials; surname = theSurname; dateOfBirth = theDateOfBirth; houseNameNumber = theHouseNameNumber; streetName = theStreetName; area = theArea; cityTown = theCityTown; county = theCounty; postcode = thePostcode; password = thePassword; setNumberAccounts(theNumberAccounts); } public string getCustomerNumber() { return customerNumber; } public string getCustomerTitle() { return customerTitle; } public string getFirstName() { return firstName; } public string getInitials() { return initials; } public string getSurname() { return surname; } public string getDateOfBirth() { return dateOfBirth; } public string getHouseNameNumber() { return houseNameNumber; } public string getStreetName() { return streetName; } public string getArea() { return area; } public string getCityTown() { return cityTown; } public string getCounty() { return county; } public string getPostcode() { return postcode; } public string getPassword() { return password; } public int getNumberAccounts() { return numberAccounts; } public void setCustomerNumber(string inCustomerNumber) { customerNumber = inCustomerNumber; } public void setCustomerTitle(string inCustomerTitle) { customerTitle = inCustomerTitle; } public void setFirstName(string inFirstName) { firstName = inFirstName; } public void setInitials(string inInitials) { initials = inInitials; } public void setSurname(string inSurname) { surname = inSurname; } public void setDateOfBirth(string inDateOfBirth) { dateOfBirth = inDateOfBirth; } public void setHouseNameNumber(string inHouseNameNumber) { houseNameNumber = inHouseNameNumber; } public void setStreetName(string inStreetName) { streetName = inStreetName; } public void setArea(string inArea) { area = inArea; } public void setCityTown(string inCityTown) { cityTown = inCityTown; } public void setCounty(string inCounty) { county = inCounty; } public void setPostcode(string inPostcode) { postcode = inPostcode; } public void setPassword(string inPassword) { password = inPassword; } public void setNumberAccounts(string inNumberAccounts) { try { numberAccounts = Convert.ToInt32(inNumberAccounts); } catch (FormatException invalidInput) { System.Windows.Forms.MessageBox.Show("ERROR" + invalidInput.Message + "Please enter a valid number"); } } } } Accounts: using System; using System.Collections.Generic; using System.Linq; using System.Text; namespace e_SOFT_Banking { class Account { private string accSort; private Int64 accNumber; private string accNick; private string accDate; //not required - defaults to null private double accCurBal; private double accOverDraft; private int accNumTrans; public Account(string theAccSort, string theAccNumber, string theAccNick, string theAccDate, string theAccCurBal, string theAccOverDraft, string theAccNumTrans) { accSort = theAccSort; setAccNumber(theAccNumber); accNick = theAccNick; accDate = theAccDate; setAccCurBal(theAccCurBal); setAccOverDraft(theAccOverDraft); setAccNumTrans(theAccNumTrans); } public string getAccSort() { return accSort; } public long getAccNumber() { return accNumber; } public string getAccNick() { return accNick; } public string getAccDate() { return accDate; } public double getAccCurBal() { return accCurBal; } public double getAccOverDraft() { return accOverDraft; } public int getAccNumTrans() { return accNumTrans; } public void setAccSort(string inAccSort) { accSort = inAccSort; } public void setAccNumber(string inAccNumber) { try { accNumber = Convert.ToInt64(inAccNumber); } catch (FormatException invalidInput) { System.Windows.Forms.MessageBox.Show("ERROR" + invalidInput.Message + "Please enter a valid number"); } } public void setAccNick(string inAccNick) { accNick = inAccNick; } public void setAccDate(string inAccDate) { accDate = inAccDate; } public void setAccCurBal(string inAccCurBal) { try { accCurBal = Convert.ToDouble(inAccCurBal); } catch (FormatException invalidInput) { System.Windows.Forms.MessageBox.Show("ERROR" + invalidInput.Message + "Please enter a valid number"); } } public void setAccOverDraft(string inAccOverDraft) { try { accOverDraft = Convert.ToDouble(inAccOverDraft); } catch (FormatException invalidInput) { System.Windows.Forms.MessageBox.Show("ERROR" + invalidInput.Message + "Please enter a valid number"); } } public void setAccNumTrans(string inAccNumTrans) { try { accNumTrans = Convert.ToInt32(inAccNumTrans); } catch (FormatException invalidInput) { System.Windows.Forms.MessageBox.Show("ERROR" + invalidInput.Message + "Please enter a valid number"); } } } } Transactions: using System; using System.Collections.Generic; using System.Linq; using System.Text; namespace e_SOFT_Banking { class Transaction { private string date; private string type; private string description; private double amount; //not required - defaults to null private double balAfter; public Transaction(string theDate, string theType, string theDescription, string theAmount, string theBalAfter) { date = theDate; type = theType; description = theDescription; setAmount(theAmount); setBalAfter(theBalAfter); } public string getDate() { return date; } public string getType() { return type; } public string getDescription() { return description; } public double getAmount() { return amount; } public double getBalAfter() { return balAfter; } public void setDate(string inDate) { date = inDate; } public void setType(string inType) { type = inType; } public void setDescription(string inDescription) { description = inDescription; } public void setAmount(string inAmount) { try { amount = Convert.ToDouble(inAmount); } catch (FormatException invalidInput) { System.Windows.Forms.MessageBox.Show("ERROR" + invalidInput.Message + "Please enter a valid number"); } } public void setBalAfter(string inBalAfter) { try { balAfter = Convert.ToDouble(inBalAfter); } catch (FormatException invalidInput) { System.Windows.Forms.MessageBox.Show("ERROR" + invalidInput.Message + "Please enter a valid number"); } } } } Any help greatly appreciated.

    Read the article

  • Localhost not working after installing PHP on Mountain Lion

    - by zen
    I've installed php using brew install php54 --with-mysql, I've set up all the path correctly. which php will give me /usr/local/bin/php php -v will give me PHP 5.4.8 (cli) (built: Nov 20 2012 09:29:31) php --ini will give me: Configuration File (php.ini) Path: /usr/local/etc/php/5.4 Loaded Configuration File: /usr/local/etc/php/5.4/php.ini Scan for additional .ini files in: /usr/local/etc/php/5.4/conf.d Additional .ini files parsed: (none) apachectl -V | grep httpd.conf will give me -D SERVER_CONFIG_FILE="/private/etc/apache2/httpd.conf" I believe everything is correct, but after I restarted my apache I keep getting error Service Temporarily Unavailable The server is temporarily unable to service your request due to maintenance downtime or capacity problems. Please try again later. This is my httpd.conf file: # # This is the main Apache HTTP server configuration file. It contains the # configuration directives that give the server its instructions. # See <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2> for detailed information. # In particular, see # <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/mod/directives.html> # for a discussion of each configuration directive. # # Do NOT simply read the instructions in here without understanding # what they do. They're here only as hints or reminders. If you are unsure # consult the online docs. You have been warned. # # Configuration and logfile names: If the filenames you specify for many # of the server's control files begin with "/" (or "drive:/" for Win32), the # server will use that explicit path. If the filenames do *not* begin # with "/", the value of ServerRoot is prepended -- so "log/foo_log" # with ServerRoot set to "/usr" will be interpreted by the # server as "/usr/log/foo_log". # # ServerRoot: The top of the directory tree under which the server's # configuration, error, and log files are kept. # # Do not add a slash at the end of the directory path. If you point # ServerRoot at a non-local disk, be sure to point the LockFile directive # at a local disk. If you wish to share the same ServerRoot for multiple # httpd daemons, you will need to change at least LockFile and PidFile. # ServerRoot "/usr" # # Listen: Allows you to bind Apache to specific IP addresses and/or # ports, instead of the default. See also the <VirtualHost> # directive. # # Change this to Listen on specific IP addresses as shown below to # prevent Apache from glomming onto all bound IP addresses. # #Listen 12.34.56.78:80 Listen 127.0.0.1:80 # # Dynamic Shared Object (DSO) Support # # To be able to use the functionality of a module which was built as a DSO you # have to place corresponding `LoadModule' lines at this location so the # directives contained in it are actually available _before_ they are used. # Statically compiled modules (those listed by `httpd -l') do not need # to be loaded here. # # Example: # LoadModule foo_module modules/mod_foo.so # LoadModule authn_file_module libexec/apache2/mod_authn_file.so LoadModule authn_dbm_module libexec/apache2/mod_authn_dbm.so LoadModule authn_anon_module libexec/apache2/mod_authn_anon.so LoadModule authn_dbd_module libexec/apache2/mod_authn_dbd.so LoadModule authn_default_module libexec/apache2/mod_authn_default.so LoadModule authz_host_module libexec/apache2/mod_authz_host.so LoadModule authz_groupfile_module libexec/apache2/mod_authz_groupfile.so LoadModule authz_user_module libexec/apache2/mod_authz_user.so LoadModule authz_dbm_module libexec/apache2/mod_authz_dbm.so LoadModule authz_owner_module libexec/apache2/mod_authz_owner.so LoadModule authz_default_module libexec/apache2/mod_authz_default.so LoadModule auth_basic_module libexec/apache2/mod_auth_basic.so LoadModule auth_digest_module libexec/apache2/mod_auth_digest.so LoadModule cache_module libexec/apache2/mod_cache.so LoadModule disk_cache_module libexec/apache2/mod_disk_cache.so LoadModule mem_cache_module libexec/apache2/mod_mem_cache.so LoadModule dbd_module libexec/apache2/mod_dbd.so LoadModule dumpio_module libexec/apache2/mod_dumpio.so LoadModule reqtimeout_module libexec/apache2/mod_reqtimeout.so LoadModule ext_filter_module libexec/apache2/mod_ext_filter.so LoadModule include_module libexec/apache2/mod_include.so LoadModule filter_module libexec/apache2/mod_filter.so LoadModule substitute_module libexec/apache2/mod_substitute.so LoadModule deflate_module libexec/apache2/mod_deflate.so LoadModule log_config_module libexec/apache2/mod_log_config.so LoadModule log_forensic_module libexec/apache2/mod_log_forensic.so LoadModule logio_module libexec/apache2/mod_logio.so LoadModule env_module libexec/apache2/mod_env.so LoadModule mime_magic_module libexec/apache2/mod_mime_magic.so LoadModule cern_meta_module libexec/apache2/mod_cern_meta.so LoadModule expires_module libexec/apache2/mod_expires.so LoadModule headers_module libexec/apache2/mod_headers.so LoadModule ident_module libexec/apache2/mod_ident.so LoadModule usertrack_module libexec/apache2/mod_usertrack.so #LoadModule unique_id_module libexec/apache2/mod_unique_id.so LoadModule setenvif_module libexec/apache2/mod_setenvif.so LoadModule version_module libexec/apache2/mod_version.so LoadModule proxy_module libexec/apache2/mod_proxy.so LoadModule proxy_connect_module libexec/apache2/mod_proxy_connect.so LoadModule proxy_ftp_module libexec/apache2/mod_proxy_ftp.so LoadModule proxy_http_module libexec/apache2/mod_proxy_http.so LoadModule proxy_scgi_module libexec/apache2/mod_proxy_scgi.so LoadModule proxy_ajp_module libexec/apache2/mod_proxy_ajp.so LoadModule proxy_balancer_module libexec/apache2/mod_proxy_balancer.so LoadModule ssl_module libexec/apache2/mod_ssl.so LoadModule mime_module libexec/apache2/mod_mime.so LoadModule dav_module libexec/apache2/mod_dav.so LoadModule status_module libexec/apache2/mod_status.so LoadModule autoindex_module libexec/apache2/mod_autoindex.so LoadModule asis_module libexec/apache2/mod_asis.so LoadModule info_module libexec/apache2/mod_info.so LoadModule cgi_module libexec/apache2/mod_cgi.so LoadModule dav_fs_module libexec/apache2/mod_dav_fs.so LoadModule vhost_alias_module libexec/apache2/mod_vhost_alias.so LoadModule negotiation_module libexec/apache2/mod_negotiation.so LoadModule dir_module libexec/apache2/mod_dir.so LoadModule imagemap_module libexec/apache2/mod_imagemap.so LoadModule actions_module libexec/apache2/mod_actions.so LoadModule speling_module libexec/apache2/mod_speling.so LoadModule userdir_module libexec/apache2/mod_userdir.so LoadModule alias_module libexec/apache2/mod_alias.so LoadModule rewrite_module libexec/apache2/mod_rewrite.so #LoadModule perl_module libexec/apache2/mod_perl.so LoadModule php5_module local/Cellar/php54/5.4.8/libexec/apache2/libphp5.so #LoadModule hfs_apple_module libexec/apache2/mod_hfs_apple.so <IfModule !mpm_netware_module> <IfModule !mpm_winnt_module> # # If you wish httpd to run as a different user or group, you must run # httpd as root initially and it will switch. # # User/Group: The name (or #number) of the user/group to run httpd as. # It is usually good practice to create a dedicated user and group for # running httpd, as with most system services. # User _www Group _www </IfModule> </IfModule> # 'Main' server configuration # # The directives in this section set up the values used by the 'main' # server, which responds to any requests that aren't handled by a # <VirtualHost> definition. These values also provide defaults for # any <VirtualHost> containers you may define later in the file. # # All of these directives may appear inside <VirtualHost> containers, # in which case these default settings will be overridden for the # virtual host being defined. # # # ServerAdmin: Your address, where problems with the server should be # e-mailed. This address appears on some server-generated pages, such # as error documents. e.g. [email protected] # ServerAdmin [email protected] # # ServerName gives the name and port that the server uses to identify itself. # This can often be determined automatically, but we recommend you specify # it explicitly to prevent problems during startup. # # If your host doesn't have a registered DNS name, enter its IP address here. # #ServerName www.example.com:80 # # DocumentRoot: The directory out of which you will serve your # documents. By default, all requests are taken from this directory, but # symbolic links and aliases may be used to point to other locations. # DocumentRoot "/Library/WebServer/Documents" # # Each directory to which Apache has access can be configured with respect # to which services and features are allowed and/or disabled in that # directory (and its subdirectories). # # First, we configure the "default" to be a very restrictive set of # features. # <Directory /> Options FollowSymLinks AllowOverride None Order deny,allow Deny from all </Directory> # # Note that from this point forward you must specifically allow # particular features to be enabled - so if something's not working as # you might expect, make sure that you have specifically enabled it # below. # # # This should be changed to whatever you set DocumentRoot to. # <Directory "/Library/WebServer/Documents"> # # Possible values for the Options directive are "None", "All", # or any combination of: # Indexes Includes FollowSymLinks SymLinksifOwnerMatch ExecCGI MultiViews # # Note that "MultiViews" must be named *explicitly* --- "Options All" # doesn't give it to you. # # The Options directive is both complicated and important. Please see # http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/mod/core.html#options # for more information. # Options Indexes FollowSymLinks MultiViews # # AllowOverride controls what directives may be placed in .htaccess files. # It can be "All", "None", or any combination of the keywords: # Options FileInfo AuthConfig Limit # AllowOverride None # # Controls who can get stuff from this server. # Order allow,deny Allow from all </Directory> # # DirectoryIndex: sets the file that Apache will serve if a directory # is requested. # <IfModule dir_module> DirectoryIndex index.html </IfModule> # # The following lines prevent .htaccess and .htpasswd files from being # viewed by Web clients. # <FilesMatch "^\.([Hh][Tt]|[Dd][Ss]_[Ss])"> Order allow,deny Deny from all Satisfy All </FilesMatch> # # Apple specific filesystem protection. # <Files "rsrc"> Order allow,deny Deny from all Satisfy All </Files> <DirectoryMatch ".*\.\.namedfork"> Order allow,deny Deny from all Satisfy All </DirectoryMatch> # # ErrorLog: The location of the error log file. # If you do not specify an ErrorLog directive within a <VirtualHost> # container, error messages relating to that virtual host will be # logged here. If you *do* define an error logfile for a <VirtualHost> # container, that host's errors will be logged there and not here. # ErrorLog "/private/var/log/apache2/error_log" # # LogLevel: Control the number of messages logged to the error_log. # Possible values include: debug, info, notice, warn, error, crit, # alert, emerg. # LogLevel warn <IfModule log_config_module> # # The following directives define some format nicknames for use with # a CustomLog directive (see below). # LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b \"%{Referer}i\" \"%{User-Agent}i\"" combined LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b" common <IfModule logio_module> # You need to enable mod_logio.c to use %I and %O LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b \"%{Referer}i\" \"%{User-Agent}i\" %I %O" combinedio </IfModule> # # The location and format of the access logfile (Common Logfile Format). # If you do not define any access logfiles within a <VirtualHost> # container, they will be logged here. Contrariwise, if you *do* # define per-<VirtualHost> access logfiles, transactions will be # logged therein and *not* in this file. # CustomLog "/private/var/log/apache2/access_log" common # # If you prefer a logfile with access, agent, and referer information # (Combined Logfile Format) you can use the following directive. # #CustomLog "/private/var/log/apache2/access_log" combined </IfModule> <IfModule alias_module> # # Redirect: Allows you to tell clients about documents that used to # exist in your server's namespace, but do not anymore. The client # will make a new request for the document at its new location. # Example: # Redirect permanent /foo http://www.example.com/bar # # Alias: Maps web paths into filesystem paths and is used to # access content that does not live under the DocumentRoot. # Example: # Alias /webpath /full/filesystem/path # # If you include a trailing / on /webpath then the server will # require it to be present in the URL. You will also likely # need to provide a <Directory> section to allow access to # the filesystem path. # # ScriptAlias: This controls which directories contain server scripts. # ScriptAliases are essentially the same as Aliases, except that # documents in the target directory are treated as applications and # run by the server when requested rather than as documents sent to the # client. The same rules about trailing "/" apply to ScriptAlias # directives as to Alias. # ScriptAliasMatch ^/cgi-bin/((?!(?i:webobjects)).*$) "/Library/WebServer/CGI-Executables/$1" </IfModule> <IfModule cgid_module> # # ScriptSock: On threaded servers, designate the path to the UNIX # socket used to communicate with the CGI daemon of mod_cgid. # #Scriptsock /private/var/run/cgisock </IfModule> # # "/Library/WebServer/CGI-Executables" should be changed to whatever your ScriptAliased # CGI directory exists, if you have that configured. # <Directory "/Library/WebServer/CGI-Executables"> AllowOverride None Options None Order allow,deny Allow from all </Directory> # # DefaultType: the default MIME type the server will use for a document # if it cannot otherwise determine one, such as from filename extensions. # If your server contains mostly text or HTML documents, "text/plain" is # a good value. If most of your content is binary, such as applications # or images, you may want to use "application/octet-stream" instead to # keep browsers from trying to display binary files as though they are # text. # DefaultType text/plain <IfModule mime_module> # # TypesConfig points to the file containing the list of mappings from # filename extension to MIME-type. # TypesConfig /private/etc/apache2/mime.types # # AddType allows you to add to or override the MIME configuration # file specified in TypesConfig for specific file types. # #AddType application/x-gzip .tgz # # AddEncoding allows you to have certain browsers uncompress # information on the fly. Note: Not all browsers support this. # #AddEncoding x-compress .Z #AddEncoding x-gzip .gz .tgz # # If the AddEncoding directives above are commented-out, then you # probably should define those extensions to indicate media types: # AddType application/x-compress .Z AddType application/x-gzip .gz .tgz # # AddHandler allows you to map certain file extensions to "handlers": # actions unrelated to filetype. These can be either built into the server # or added with the Action directive (see below) # # To use CGI scripts outside of ScriptAliased directories: # (You will also need to add "ExecCGI" to the "Options" directive.) # #AddHandler cgi-script .cgi # For type maps (negotiated resources): #AddHandler type-map var # # Filters allow you to process content before it is sent to the client. # # To parse .shtml files for server-side includes (SSI): # (You will also need to add "Includes" to the "Options" directive.) # #AddType text/html .shtml #AddOutputFilter INCLUDES .shtml </IfModule> # # The mod_mime_magic module allows the server to use various hints from the # contents of the file itself to determine its type. The MIMEMagicFile # directive tells the module where the hint definitions are located. # #MIMEMagicFile /private/etc/apache2/magic # # Customizable error responses come in three flavors: # 1) plain text 2) local redirects 3) external redirects # # Some examples: #ErrorDocument 500 "The server made a boo boo." #ErrorDocument 404 /missing.html #ErrorDocument 404 "/cgi-bin/missing_handler.pl" #ErrorDocument 402 http://www.example.com/subscription_info.html # # # MaxRanges: Maximum number of Ranges in a request before # returning the entire resource, or one of the special # values 'default', 'none' or 'unlimited'. # Default setting is to accept 200 Ranges. #MaxRanges unlimited # # EnableMMAP and EnableSendfile: On systems that support it, # memory-mapping or the sendfile syscall is used to deliver # files. This usually improves server performance, but must # be turned off when serving from networked-mounted # filesystems or if support for these functions is otherwise # broken on your system. # #EnableMMAP off #EnableSendfile off # 6894961 TraceEnable off # Supplemental configuration # # The configuration files in the /private/etc/apache2/extra/ directory can be # included to add extra features or to modify the default configuration of # the server, or you may simply copy their contents here and change as # necessary. # Server-pool management (MPM specific) Include /private/etc/apache2/extra/httpd-mpm.conf # Multi-language error messages #Include /private/etc/apache2/extra/httpd-multilang-errordoc.conf # Fancy directory listings Include /private/etc/apache2/extra/httpd-autoindex.conf # Language settings Include /private/etc/apache2/extra/httpd-languages.conf # User home directories Include /private/etc/apache2/extra/httpd-userdir.conf # Real-time info on requests and configuration #Include /private/etc/apache2/extra/httpd-info.conf # Virtual hosts #Include /private/etc/apache2/extra/httpd-vhosts.conf # Local access to the Apache HTTP Server Manual Include /private/etc/apache2/extra/httpd-manual.conf # Distributed authoring and versioning (WebDAV) #Include /private/etc/apache2/extra/httpd-dav.conf # Various default settings #Include /private/etc/apache2/extra/httpd-default.conf # Secure (SSL/TLS) connections #Include /private/etc/apache2/extra/httpd-ssl.conf # # Note: The following must must be present to support # starting without SSL on platforms with no /dev/random equivalent # but a statically compiled-in mod_ssl. # <IfModule ssl_module> SSLRandomSeed startup builtin SSLRandomSeed connect builtin </IfModule> Include /private/etc/apache2/other/*.conf Please help me, I've spent 2 days trying to make it work. Btw error log keep saying [Tue Nov 20 10:47:40 2012] [error] proxy: HTTP: disabled connection for (localhost) and [Tue Nov 20 11:59:32 2012] [error] (61)Connection refused: proxy: HTTP: attempt to connect to [fe80::1]:20559 (localhost) failed

    Read the article

  • Setting up Mono/ASP.NET 4.0 on Apache2/Ubuntu: Virtual hosts?

    - by Dave
    I'm attempting to setup Mono/ASP.NET 4.0 on my Apache server (which is running on Ubuntu). Thus far, I've been following a few tutorials/scripts supplied here, and here. As of now: Apache 2.2 is installed (accessible via 'localhost') Mono 2.10.5 is installed However, I'm struggling to configure Apache correctly... apparently the Virtual Host setting isn't doing its job and invoking the mod_mono plugin, nor is it even pulling source from the proper directory. While the Virtual Host setting points to '\srv\www\localhost', it clearly is pulling content instead from 'var/www/', which I've found is the default DocumentRoot for virtual hosts. I can confirm: "/opt/mono-2.10/bin/mod-mono-server4" exists. Virtual hosts file is being read, since undoing the comment in the main httpd.conf changed the root directory from 'htdocs' to 'var/www/' The Mono installation is at least semi-capable of running ASP 4.0, as evidenced by running XSP, navigating to 0.0.0.0:8080/ and getting an ASP.NET style error page with "Mono ASP 4.0.x" at the bottom. Can anyone point out how to fix these configurations and get Mono linked up with Apache? Here are my configs and relevant information: /usr/local/apache2/conf/httpd.conf: # # This is the main Apache HTTP server configuration file. It contains the # configuration directives that give the server its instructions. # See <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2> for detailed information. # In particular, see # <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/mod/directives.html> # for a discussion of each configuration directive. # # Do NOT simply read the instructions in here without understanding # what they do. They're here only as hints or reminders. If you are unsure # consult the online docs. You have been warned. # # Configuration and logfile names: If the filenames you specify for many # of the server's control files begin with "/" (or "drive:/" for Win32), the # server will use that explicit path. If the filenames do *not* begin # with "/", the value of ServerRoot is prepended -- so "logs/foo_log" # with ServerRoot set to "/usr/local/apache2" will be interpreted by the # server as "/usr/local/apache2/logs/foo_log". # # ServerRoot: The top of the directory tree under which the server's # configuration, error, and log files are kept. # # Do not add a slash at the end of the directory path. If you point # ServerRoot at a non-local disk, be sure to point the LockFile directive # at a local disk. If you wish to share the same ServerRoot for multiple # httpd daemons, you will need to change at least LockFile and PidFile. # ServerRoot "/usr/local/apache2" # # Listen: Allows you to bind Apache to specific IP addresses and/or # ports, instead of the default. See also the <VirtualHost> # directive. # # Change this to Listen on specific IP addresses as shown below to # prevent Apache from glomming onto all bound IP addresses. # #Listen 12.34.56.78:80 Listen 80 # # Dynamic Shared Object (DSO) Support # # To be able to use the functionality of a module which was built as a DSO you # have to place corresponding `LoadModule' lines at this location so the # directives contained in it are actually available _before_ they are used. # Statically compiled modules (those listed by `httpd -l') do not need # to be loaded here. # # Example: # LoadModule foo_module modules/mod_foo.so # <IfModule !mpm_netware_module> <IfModule !mpm_winnt_module> # # If you wish httpd to run as a different user or group, you must run # httpd as root initially and it will switch. # # User/Group: The name (or #number) of the user/group to run httpd as. # It is usually good practice to create a dedicated user and group for # running httpd, as with most system services. # User daemon Group daemon </IfModule> </IfModule> # 'Main' server configuration # # The directives in this section set up the values used by the 'main' # server, which responds to any requests that aren't handled by a # <VirtualHost> definition. These values also provide defaults for # any <VirtualHost> containers you may define later in the file. # # All of these directives may appear inside <VirtualHost> containers, # in which case these default settings will be overridden for the # virtual host being defined. # # # ServerAdmin: Your address, where problems with the server should be # e-mailed. This address appears on some server-generated pages, such # as error documents. e.g. [email protected] # ServerAdmin david@localhost # # ServerName gives the name and port that the server uses to identify itself. # This can often be determined automatically, but we recommend you specify # it explicitly to prevent problems during startup. # # If your host doesn't have a registered DNS name, enter its IP address here. # ServerName localhost:80 # # DocumentRoot: The directory out of which you will serve your # documents. By default, all requests are taken from this directory, but # symbolic links and aliases may be used to point to other locations. # DocumentRoot "/usr/local/apache2/htdocs" # # Each directory to which Apache has access can be configured with respect # to which services and features are allowed and/or disabled in that # directory (and its subdirectories). # # First, we configure the "default" to be a very restrictive set of # features. # <Directory /> Options FollowSymLinks AllowOverride None Order deny,allow Deny from all </Directory> # # Note that from this point forward you must specifically allow # particular features to be enabled - so if something's not working as # you might expect, make sure that you have specifically enabled it # below. # # # This should be changed to whatever you set DocumentRoot to. # <Directory "/usr/local/apache2/htdocs"> # # Possible values for the Options directive are "None", "All", # or any combination of: # Indexes Includes FollowSymLinks SymLinksifOwnerMatch ExecCGI MultiViews # # Note that "MultiViews" must be named *explicitly* --- "Options All" # doesn't give it to you. # # The Options directive is both complicated and important. Please see # http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/mod/core.html#options # for more information. # Options Indexes FollowSymLinks # # AllowOverride controls what directives may be placed in .htaccess files. # It can be "All", "None", or any combination of the keywords: # Options FileInfo AuthConfig Limit # AllowOverride None # # Controls who can get stuff from this server. # Order allow,deny Allow from all </Directory> # # DirectoryIndex: sets the file that Apache will serve if a directory # is requested. # <IfModule dir_module> DirectoryIndex index.html </IfModule> # # The following lines prevent .htaccess and .htpasswd files from being # viewed by Web clients. # <FilesMatch "^\.ht"> Order allow,deny Deny from all Satisfy All </FilesMatch> # # ErrorLog: The location of the error log file. # If you do not specify an ErrorLog directive within a <VirtualHost> # container, error messages relating to that virtual host will be # logged here. If you *do* define an error logfile for a <VirtualHost> # container, that host's errors will be logged there and not here. # ErrorLog "logs/error_log" # # LogLevel: Control the number of messages logged to the error_log. # Possible values include: debug, info, notice, warn, error, crit, # alert, emerg. # LogLevel warn <IfModule log_config_module> # # The following directives define some format nicknames for use with # a CustomLog directive (see below). # LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b \"%{Referer}i\" \"%{User-Agent}i\"" combined LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b" common <IfModule logio_module> # You need to enable mod_logio.c to use %I and %O LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b \"%{Referer}i\" \"%{User-Agent}i\" %I %O" combinedio </IfModule> # # The location and format of the access logfile (Common Logfile Format). # If you do not define any access logfiles within a <VirtualHost> # container, they will be logged here. Contrariwise, if you *do* # define per-<VirtualHost> access logfiles, transactions will be # logged therein and *not* in this file. # CustomLog "logs/access_log" common # # If you prefer a logfile with access, agent, and referer information # (Combined Logfile Format) you can use the following directive. # #CustomLog "logs/access_log" combined </IfModule> <IfModule alias_module> # # Redirect: Allows you to tell clients about documents that used to # exist in your server's namespace, but do not anymore. The client # will make a new request for the document at its new location. # Example: # Redirect permanent /foo http://www.example.com/bar # # Alias: Maps web paths into filesystem paths and is used to # access content that does not live under the DocumentRoot. # Example: # Alias /webpath /full/filesystem/path # # If you include a trailing / on /webpath then the server will # require it to be present in the URL. You will also likely # need to provide a <Directory> section to allow access to # the filesystem path. # # ScriptAlias: This controls which directories contain server scripts. # ScriptAliases are essentially the same as Aliases, except that # documents in the target directory are treated as applications and # run by the server when requested rather than as documents sent to the # client. The same rules about trailing "/" apply to ScriptAlias # directives as to Alias. # ScriptAlias /cgi-bin/ "/usr/local/apache2/cgi-bin/" </IfModule> <IfModule cgid_module> # # ScriptSock: On threaded servers, designate the path to the UNIX # socket used to communicate with the CGI daemon of mod_cgid. # #Scriptsock logs/cgisock </IfModule> # # "/usr/local/apache2/cgi-bin" should be changed to whatever your ScriptAliased # CGI directory exists, if you have that configured. # <Directory "/usr/local/apache2/cgi-bin"> AllowOverride None Options None Order allow,deny Allow from all </Directory> # # DefaultType: the default MIME type the server will use for a document # if it cannot otherwise determine one, such as from filename extensions. # If your server contains mostly text or HTML documents, "text/plain" is # a good value. If most of your content is binary, such as applications # or images, you may want to use "application/octet-stream" instead to # keep browsers from trying to display binary files as though they are # text. # DefaultType text/plain <IfModule mime_module> # # TypesConfig points to the file containing the list of mappings from # filename extension to MIME-type. # TypesConfig conf/mime.types # # AddType allows you to add to or override the MIME configuration # file specified in TypesConfig for specific file types. # #AddType application/x-gzip .tgz # # AddEncoding allows you to have certain browsers uncompress # information on the fly. Note: Not all browsers support this. # #AddEncoding x-compress .Z #AddEncoding x-gzip .gz .tgz # # If the AddEncoding directives above are commented-out, then you # probably should define those extensions to indicate media types: # AddType application/x-compress .Z AddType application/x-gzip .gz .tgz # # AddHandler allows you to map certain file extensions to "handlers": # actions unrelated to filetype. These can be either built into the server # or added with the Action directive (see below) # # To use CGI scripts outside of ScriptAliased directories: # (You will also need to add "ExecCGI" to the "Options" directive.) # #AddHandler cgi-script .cgi # For type maps (negotiated resources): #AddHandler type-map var # # Filters allow you to process content before it is sent to the client. # # To parse .shtml files for server-side includes (SSI): # (You will also need to add "Includes" to the "Options" directive.) # #AddType text/html .shtml #AddOutputFilter INCLUDES .shtml </IfModule> # # The mod_mime_magic module allows the server to use various hints from the # contents of the file itself to determine its type. The MIMEMagicFile # directive tells the module where the hint definitions are located. # #MIMEMagicFile conf/magic # # Customizable error responses come in three flavors: # 1) plain text 2) local redirects 3) external redirects # # Some examples: #ErrorDocument 500 "The server made a boo boo." #ErrorDocument 404 /missing.html #ErrorDocument 404 "/cgi-bin/missing_handler.pl" #ErrorDocument 402 http://www.example.com/subscription_info.html # # # MaxRanges: Maximum number of Ranges in a request before # returning the entire resource, or 0 for unlimited # Default setting is to accept 200 Ranges #MaxRanges 0 # # EnableMMAP and EnableSendfile: On systems that support it, # memory-mapping or the sendfile syscall is used to deliver # files. This usually improves server performance, but must # be turned off when serving from networked-mounted # filesystems or if support for these functions is otherwise # broken on your system. # #EnableMMAP off #EnableSendfile off # Supplemental configuration # # The configuration files in the conf/extra/ directory can be # included to add extra features or to modify the default configuration of # the server, or you may simply copy their contents here and change as # necessary. # Server-pool management (MPM specific) #Include conf/extra/httpd-mpm.conf # Multi-language error messages #Include conf/extra/httpd-multilang-errordoc.conf # Fancy directory listings #Include conf/extra/httpd-autoindex.conf # Language settings #Include conf/extra/httpd-languages.conf # User home directories #Include conf/extra/httpd-userdir.conf # Real-time info on requests and configuration #Include conf/extra/httpd-info.conf # Virtual hosts Include conf/extra/httpd-vhosts.conf # Local access to the Apache HTTP Server Manual #Include conf/extra/httpd-manual.conf # Distributed authoring and versioning (WebDAV) #Include conf/extra/httpd-dav.conf # Various default settings #Include conf/extra/httpd-default.conf # Secure (SSL/TLS) connections #Include conf/extra/httpd-ssl.conf # # Note: The following must must be present to support # starting without SSL on platforms with no /dev/random equivalent # but a statically compiled-in mod_ssl. # <IfModule ssl_module> SSLRandomSeed startup builtin SSLRandomSeed connect builtin </IfModule> * /usr/local/apache2/conf/extra/httpd-vhosts.conf * # # Virtual Hosts # # If you want to maintain multiple domains/hostnames on your # machine you can setup VirtualHost containers for them. Most configurations # use only name-based virtual hosts so the server doesn't need to worry about # IP addresses. This is indicated by the asterisks in the directives below. # # Please see the documentation at # <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/vhosts/> # for further details before you try to setup virtual hosts. # # You may use the command line option '-S' to verify your virtual host # configuration. # # Use name-based virtual hosting. # NameVirtualHost *:80 # # VirtualHost example: # Almost any Apache directive may go into a VirtualHost container. # The first VirtualHost section is used for all requests that do not # match a ServerName or ServerAlias in any <VirtualHost> block. # <VirtualHost *:80> ServerName localhost ServerAdmin david@localhost DocumentRoot "/srv/www/localhost" # MonoServerPath can be changed to specify which version of ASP.NET is hosted # mod-mono-server1 = ASP.NET 1.1 / mod-mono-server2 = ASP.NET 2.0 # For SUSE Linux Enterprise Mono Extension, uncomment the line below: # MonoServerPath localhost "/opt/novell/mono/bin/mod-mono-server2" # For Mono on openSUSE, uncomment the line below instead: MonoServerPath localhost "/opt/mono-2.10/bin/mod-mono-server4" # To obtain line numbers in stack traces you need to do two things: # 1) Enable Debug code generation in your page by using the Debug="true" # page directive, or by setting <compilation debug="true" /> in the # application's Web.config # 2) Uncomment the MonoDebug true directive below to enable mod_mono debugging MonoDebug localhost true # The MONO_IOMAP environment variable can be configured to provide platform abstraction # for file access in Linux. Valid values for MONO_IOMAP are: # case # drive # all # Uncomment the line below to alter file access behavior for the configured application MonoSetEnv localhost PATH=/opt/mono-2.10/bin:$PATH;LD_LIBRARY_PATH=/opt/mono-2.10/lib:$LD_LIBRARY_PATH; # # Additional environtment variables can be set for this server instance using # the MonoSetEnv directive. MonoSetEnv takes a string of 'name=value' pairs # separated by semicolons. For instance, to enable platform abstraction *and* # use Mono's old regular expression interpreter (which is slower, but has a # shorter setup time), uncomment the line below instead: # MonoSetEnv localhost MONO_IOMAP=all;MONO_OLD_RX=1 MonoApplications localhost "/:/srv/www/localhost" <Location "/"> Allow from all Order allow,deny MonoSetServerAlias localhost SetHandler mono SetOutputFilter DEFLATE SetEnvIfNoCase Request_URI "\.(?:gif|jpe?g|png)$" no-gzip dont-vary </Location> <IfModule mod_deflate.c> AddOutputFilterByType DEFLATE text/html text/plain text/xml text/javascript </IfModule> </VirtualHost> <VirtualHost *:80> ServerAdmin [email protected] DocumentRoot "/usr/local/apache2/docs/dummy-host.example.com" ServerName dummy-host.example.com ServerAlias www.dummy-host.example.com ErrorLog "logs/dummy-host.example.com-error_log" CustomLog "logs/dummy-host.example.com-access_log" common </VirtualHost> <VirtualHost *:80> ServerAdmin [email protected] DocumentRoot "/usr/local/apache2/docs/dummy-host2.example.com" ServerName dummy-host2.example.com ErrorLog "logs/dummy-host2.example.com-error_log" CustomLog "logs/dummy-host2.example.com-access_log" common </VirtualHost> mono -V output: root@david-ubuntu:~# mono -V Mono JIT compiler version 2.6.7 (Debian 2.6.7-5ubuntu3) Copyright (C) 2002-2010 Novell, Inc and Contributors. www.mono-project.com TLS: __thread GC: Included Boehm (with typed GC and Parallel Mark) SIGSEGV: altstack Notifications: epoll Architecture: amd64 Disabled: none

    Read the article

  • Windows could not start Apache 2 on the local computer

    - by andig
    After installing PHP 5.3, Windows is unable to start Apache 2.2. Apache's error log is empty, no error message on startup: C:\Programme\Apache\bin>httpd -k start C:\Programme\Apache\bin>httpd -k stop The Apache2.2 service is not started. C:\Programme\Apache\bin>httpd -k config Reconfiguring the Apache2.2 service The Apache2.2 service is successfully installed. Testing httpd.conf.... Errors reported here must be corrected before the service can be started. I have no clue where to look for the cause. php5apache2_2.dll is copied to the Apache modules folder. The configuration looks like this: LoadModule php5_module modules/php5apache2_2.dll PHPIniDir "C:/programme/php" Where and how can I start diagnosis? The only hint I have so far is that startup fails as soon as a PHP module is enabled in the configuration. Is there a way to get more details out of the Apache startup process? This is the http.conf: # # This is the main Apache HTTP server configuration file. It contains the # configuration directives that give the server its instructions. # See <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2> for detailed information. # In particular, see # <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/mod/directives.html> # for a discussion of each configuration directive. # # Do NOT simply read the instructions in here without understanding # what they do. They're here only as hints or reminders. If you are unsure # consult the online docs. You have been warned. # # Configuration and logfile names: If the filenames you specify for many # of the server's control files begin with "/" (or "drive:/" for Win32), the # server will use that explicit path. If the filenames do *not* begin # with "/", the value of ServerRoot is prepended -- so "logs/foo.log" # with ServerRoot set to "C:/Programme/Apache" will be interpreted by the # server as "C:/Programme/Apache/logs/foo.log". # # NOTE: Where filenames are specified, you must use forward slashes # instead of backslashes (e.g., "c:/apache" instead of "c:\apache"). # If a drive letter is omitted, the drive on which httpd.exe is located # will be used by default. It is recommended that you always supply # an explicit drive letter in absolute paths to avoid confusion. # # ServerRoot: The top of the directory tree under which the server's # configuration, error, and log files are kept. # # Do not add a slash at the end of the directory path. If you point # ServerRoot at a non-local disk, be sure to point the LockFile directive # at a local disk. If you wish to share the same ServerRoot for multiple # httpd daemons, you will need to change at least LockFile and PidFile. # ServerRoot "C:/Programme/Apache" # # Listen: Allows you to bind Apache to specific IP addresses and/or # ports, instead of the default. See also the <VirtualHost> # directive. # # Change this to Listen on specific IP addresses as shown below to # prevent Apache from glomming onto all bound IP addresses. # #Listen 12.34.56.78:80 Listen 80 # # Dynamic Shared Object (DSO) Support # # To be able to use the functionality of a module which was built as a DSO you # have to place corresponding `LoadModule' lines at this location so the # directives contained in it are actually available _before_ they are used. # Statically compiled modules (those listed by `httpd -l') do not need # to be loaded here. # # Example: # LoadModule foo_module modules/mod_foo.so # LoadModule actions_module modules/mod_actions.so LoadModule alias_module modules/mod_alias.so LoadModule asis_module modules/mod_asis.so LoadModule auth_basic_module modules/mod_auth_basic.so #LoadModule auth_digest_module modules/mod_auth_digest.so #LoadModule authn_alias_module modules/mod_authn_alias.so #LoadModule authn_anon_module modules/mod_authn_anon.so #LoadModule authn_dbd_module modules/mod_authn_dbd.so #LoadModule authn_dbm_module modules/mod_authn_dbm.so LoadModule authn_default_module modules/mod_authn_default.so LoadModule authn_file_module modules/mod_authn_file.so #LoadModule authnz_ldap_module modules/mod_authnz_ldap.so #LoadModule authz_dbm_module modules/mod_authz_dbm.so LoadModule authz_default_module modules/mod_authz_default.so LoadModule authz_groupfile_module modules/mod_authz_groupfile.so LoadModule authz_host_module modules/mod_authz_host.so #LoadModule authz_owner_module modules/mod_authz_owner.so LoadModule authz_user_module modules/mod_authz_user.so LoadModule autoindex_module modules/mod_autoindex.so #LoadModule cache_module modules/mod_cache.so #LoadModule cern_meta_module modules/mod_cern_meta.so LoadModule cgi_module modules/mod_cgi.so #LoadModule charset_lite_module modules/mod_charset_lite.so #LoadModule dav_module modules/mod_dav.so #LoadModule dav_fs_module modules/mod_dav_fs.so #LoadModule dav_lock_module modules/mod_dav_lock.so #LoadModule dbd_module modules/mod_dbd.so #LoadModule deflate_module modules/mod_deflate.so LoadModule dir_module modules/mod_dir.so #LoadModule disk_cache_module modules/mod_disk_cache.so #LoadModule dumpio_module modules/mod_dumpio.so LoadModule env_module modules/mod_env.so #LoadModule expires_module modules/mod_expires.so #LoadModule ext_filter_module modules/mod_ext_filter.so #LoadModule file_cache_module modules/mod_file_cache.so #LoadModule filter_module modules/mod_filter.so #LoadModule headers_module modules/mod_headers.so #LoadModule ident_module modules/mod_ident.so #LoadModule imagemap_module modules/mod_imagemap.so LoadModule include_module modules/mod_include.so #LoadModule info_module modules/mod_info.so LoadModule isapi_module modules/mod_isapi.so #LoadModule ldap_module modules/mod_ldap.so #LoadModule logio_module modules/mod_logio.so LoadModule log_config_module modules/mod_log_config.so #LoadModule log_forensic_module modules/mod_log_forensic.so #LoadModule mem_cache_module modules/mod_mem_cache.so LoadModule mime_module modules/mod_mime.so #LoadModule mime_magic_module modules/mod_mime_magic.so LoadModule negotiation_module modules/mod_negotiation.so #LoadModule proxy_module modules/mod_proxy.so #LoadModule proxy_ajp_module modules/mod_proxy_ajp.so #LoadModule proxy_balancer_module modules/mod_proxy_balancer.so #LoadModule proxy_connect_module modules/mod_proxy_connect.so #LoadModule proxy_ftp_module modules/mod_proxy_ftp.so #LoadModule proxy_http_module modules/mod_proxy_http.so #LoadModule proxy_scgi_module modules/mod_proxy_scgi.so #LoadModule reqtimeout_module modules/mod_reqtimeout.so #LoadModule rewrite_module modules/mod_rewrite.so LoadModule setenvif_module modules/mod_setenvif.so #LoadModule speling_module modules/mod_speling.so #LoadModule ssl_module modules/mod_ssl.so #LoadModule status_module modules/mod_status.so #LoadModule substitute_module modules/mod_substitute.so #LoadModule unique_id_module modules/mod_unique_id.so #LoadModule userdir_module modules/mod_userdir.so #LoadModule usertrack_module modules/mod_usertrack.so #LoadModule version_module modules/mod_version.so #LoadModule vhost_alias_module modules/mod_vhost_alias.so #!! LoadModule php5_module modules/php5apache2_2.dll PHPIniDir "C:/programme/php" <IfModule !mpm_netware_module> <IfModule !mpm_winnt_module> # # If you wish httpd to run as a different user or group, you must run # httpd as root initially and it will switch. # # User/Group: The name (or #number) of the user/group to run httpd as. # It is usually good practice to create a dedicated user and group for # running httpd, as with most system services. # User daemon Group daemon </IfModule> </IfModule> # 'Main' server configuration # # The directives in this section set up the values used by the 'main' # server, which responds to any requests that aren't handled by a # <VirtualHost> definition. These values also provide defaults for # any <VirtualHost> containers you may define later in the file. # # All of these directives may appear inside <VirtualHost> containers, # in which case these default settings will be overridden for the # virtual host being defined. # # # ServerAdmin: Your address, where problems with the server should be # e-mailed. This address appears on some server-generated pages, such # as error documents. e.g. [email protected] # ServerAdmin [email protected] # # ServerName gives the name and port that the server uses to identify itself. # This can often be determined automatically, but we recommend you specify # it explicitly to prevent problems during startup. # # If your host doesn't have a registered DNS name, enter its IP address here. # #ServerName localhost:8080 # # DocumentRoot: The directory out of which you will serve your # documents. By default, all requests are taken from this directory, but # symbolic links and aliases may be used to point to other locations. # DocumentRoot "C:/data/htdocs" # # Each directory to which Apache has access can be configured with respect # to which services and features are allowed and/or disabled in that # directory (and its subdirectories). # # First, we configure the "default" to be a very restrictive set of # features. # <Directory /> Options FollowSymLinks AllowOverride None Order deny,allow Deny from all </Directory> # # Note that from this point forward you must specifically allow # particular features to be enabled - so if something's not working as # you might expect, make sure that you have specifically enabled it # below. # # # This should be changed to whatever you set DocumentRoot to. # <Directory "C:/data/htdocs"> # # Possible values for the Options directive are "None", "All", # or any combination of: # Indexes Includes FollowSymLinks SymLinksifOwnerMatch ExecCGI MultiViews # # Note that "MultiViews" must be named *explicitly* --- "Options All" # doesn't give it to you. # # The Options directive is both complicated and important. Please see # http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/mod/core.html#options # for more information. # Options Indexes FollowSymLinks # # AllowOverride controls what directives may be placed in .htaccess files. # It can be "All", "None", or any combination of the keywords: # Options FileInfo AuthConfig Limit # AllowOverride None # # Controls who can get stuff from this server. # Order allow,deny Allow from all </Directory> # # DirectoryIndex: sets the file that Apache will serve if a directory # is requested. # <IfModule dir_module> DirectoryIndex index.html </IfModule> # # The following lines prevent .htaccess and .htpasswd files from being # viewed by Web clients. # <FilesMatch "^\.ht"> Order allow,deny Deny from all Satisfy All </FilesMatch> # # ErrorLog: The location of the error log file. # If you do not specify an ErrorLog directive within a <VirtualHost> # container, error messages relating to that virtual host will be # logged here. If you *do* define an error logfile for a <VirtualHost> # container, that host's errors will be logged there and not here. # ErrorLog "logs/error.log" # # LogLevel: Control the number of messages logged to the error_log. # Possible values include: debug, info, notice, warn, error, crit, # alert, emerg. # LogLevel debug <IfModule log_config_module> # # The following directives define some format nicknames for use with # a CustomLog directive (see below). # LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b \"%{Referer}i\" \"%{User-Agent}i\"" combined LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b" common <IfModule logio_module> # You need to enable mod_logio.c to use %I and %O LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b \"%{Referer}i\" \"%{User-Agent}i\" %I %O" combinedio </IfModule> # # The location and format of the access logfile (Common Logfile Format). # If you do not define any access logfiles within a <VirtualHost> # container, they will be logged here. Contrariwise, if you *do* # define per-<VirtualHost> access logfiles, transactions will be # logged therein and *not* in this file. # CustomLog "logs/access.log" common # # If you prefer a logfile with access, agent, and referer information # (Combined Logfile Format) you can use the following directive. # #CustomLog "logs/access.log" combined </IfModule> <IfModule alias_module> # # Redirect: Allows you to tell clients about documents that used to # exist in your server's namespace, but do not anymore. The client # will make a new request for the document at its new location. # Example: # Redirect permanent /foo http://localhost/bar # # Alias: Maps web paths into filesystem paths and is used to # access content that does not live under the DocumentRoot. # Example: # Alias /webpath /full/filesystem/path # # If you include a trailing / on /webpath then the server will # require it to be present in the URL. You will also likely # need to provide a <Directory> section to allow access to # the filesystem path. # # ScriptAlias: This controls which directories contain server scripts. # ScriptAliases are essentially the same as Aliases, except that # documents in the target directory are treated as applications and # run by the server when requested rather than as documents sent to the # client. The same rules about trailing "/" apply to ScriptAlias # directives as to Alias. # ScriptAlias /cgi-bin/ "C:/Programme/Apache/cgi-bin/" </IfModule> <IfModule cgid_module> # # ScriptSock: On threaded servers, designate the path to the UNIX # socket used to communicate with the CGI daemon of mod_cgid. # #Scriptsock logs/cgisock </IfModule> # # "C:/Programme/Apache/cgi-bin" should be changed to whatever your ScriptAliased # CGI directory exists, if you have that configured. # <Directory "C:/Programme/Apache/cgi-bin"> AllowOverride None Options None Order allow,deny Allow from all </Directory> # # DefaultType: the default MIME type the server will use for a document # if it cannot otherwise determine one, such as from filename extensions. # If your server contains mostly text or HTML documents, "text/plain" is # a good value. If most of your content is binary, such as applications # or images, you may want to use "application/octet-stream" instead to # keep browsers from trying to display binary files as though they are # text. # DefaultType text/plain <IfModule mime_module> # # TypesConfig points to the file containing the list of mappings from # filename extension to MIME-type. # TypesConfig conf/mime.types # # AddType allows you to add to or override the MIME configuration # file specified in TypesConfig for specific file types. # #AddType application/x-gzip .tgz # # AddEncoding allows you to have certain browsers uncompress # information on the fly. Note: Not all browsers support this. # #AddEncoding x-compress .Z #AddEncoding x-gzip .gz .tgz # # If the AddEncoding directives above are commented-out, then you # probably should define those extensions to indicate media types: # AddType application/x-compress .Z AddType application/x-gzip .gz .tgz # # AddHandler allows you to map certain file extensions to "handlers": # actions unrelated to filetype. These can be either built into the server # or added with the Action directive (see below) # # To use CGI scripts outside of ScriptAliased directories: # (You will also need to add "ExecCGI" to the "Options" directive.) # #AddHandler cgi-script .cgi # For type maps (negotiated resources): #AddHandler type-map var # # Filters allow you to process content before it is sent to the client. # # To parse .shtml files for server-side includes (SSI): # (You will also need to add "Includes" to the "Options" directive.) # #AddType text/html .shtml #AddOutputFilter INCLUDES .shtml </IfModule> # # The mod_mime_magic module allows the server to use various hints from the # contents of the file itself to determine its type. The MIMEMagicFile # directive tells the module where the hint definitions are located. # #MIMEMagicFile conf/magic # # Customizable error responses come in three flavors: # 1) plain text 2) local redirects 3) external redirects # # Some examples: #ErrorDocument 500 "The server made a boo boo." #ErrorDocument 404 /missing.html #ErrorDocument 404 "/cgi-bin/missing_handler.pl" #ErrorDocument 402 http://localhost/subscription_info.html # # # EnableMMAP and EnableSendfile: On systems that support it, # memory-mapping or the sendfile syscall is used to deliver # files. This usually improves server performance, but must # be turned off when serving from networked-mounted # filesystems or if support for these functions is otherwise # broken on your system. # #EnableMMAP off #EnableSendfile off # Supplemental configuration # # The configuration files in the conf/extra/ directory can be # included to add extra features or to modify the default configuration of # the server, or you may simply copy their contents here and change as # necessary. # Server-pool management (MPM specific) #Include conf/extra/httpd-mpm.conf # Multi-language error messages #Include conf/extra/httpd-multilang-errordoc.conf # Fancy directory listings #Include conf/extra/httpd-autoindex.conf # Language settings #Include conf/extra/httpd-languages.conf # User home directories #Include conf/extra/httpd-userdir.conf # Real-time info on requests and configuration #Include conf/extra/httpd-info.conf # Virtual hosts #Include conf/extra/httpd-vhosts.conf # Local access to the Apache HTTP Server Manual #Include conf/extra/httpd-manual.conf # Distributed authoring and versioning (WebDAV) #Include conf/extra/httpd-dav.conf # Various default settings #Include conf/extra/httpd-default.conf # Secure (SSL/TLS) connections #Include conf/extra/httpd-ssl.conf # # Note: The following must must be present to support # starting without SSL on platforms with no /dev/random equivalent # but a statically compiled-in mod_ssl. # <IfModule ssl_module> SSLRandomSeed startup builtin SSLRandomSeed connect builtin </IfModule> #!! <IfModule mod_php5.c> AddType application/x-httpd-php .php AddType application/x-httpd-php .php5 AddType application/x-httpd-php-source .phps </IfModule>

    Read the article

  • Apache won't accept external requests

    - by Eric
    I am running Apache 2.2 on windows and I would like to access it remotely. Currently I can only access it from my local machine. I know the problem is not port forwarding because I tested it with other web servers (written in python). My httpd.conf file is below. I installed apache with the PHP installer. # # This is the main Apache HTTP server configuration file. It contains the # configuration directives that give the server its instructions. # See <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2> for detailed information. # In particular, see # <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/mod/directives.html> # for a discussion of each configuration directive. # # Do NOT simply read the instructions in here without understanding # what they do. They're here only as hints or reminders. If you are unsure # consult the online docs. You have been warned. # # Configuration and logfile names: If the filenames you specify for many # of the server's control files begin with "/" (or "drive:/" for Win32), the # server will use that explicit path. If the filenames do *not* begin # with "/", the value of ServerRoot is prepended -- so "logs/foo.log" # with ServerRoot set to "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2" will be interpreted by the # server as "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2/logs/foo.log". # # NOTE: Where filenames are specified, you must use forward slashes # instead of backslashes (e.g., "c:/apache" instead of "c:\apache"). # If a drive letter is omitted, the drive on which httpd.exe is located # will be used by default. It is recommended that you always supply # an explicit drive letter in absolute paths to avoid confusion. # # ServerRoot: The top of the directory tree under which the server's # configuration, error, and log files are kept. # # Do not add a slash at the end of the directory path. If you point # ServerRoot at a non-local disk, be sure to point the LockFile directive # at a local disk. If you wish to share the same ServerRoot for multiple # httpd daemons, you will need to change at least LockFile and PidFile. # ServerRoot "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2" # # Listen: Allows you to bind Apache to specific IP addresses and/or # ports, instead of the default. See also the <VirtualHost> # directive. # # Change this to Listen on specific IP addresses as shown below to # prevent Apache from glomming onto all bound IP addresses. # #Listen 12.34.56.78:80 Listen 80 # # Dynamic Shared Object (DSO) Support # # To be able to use the functionality of a module which was built as a DSO you # have to place corresponding `LoadModule' lines at this location so the # directives contained in it are actually available _before_ they are used. # Statically compiled modules (those listed by `httpd -l') do not need # to be loaded here. # # Example: # LoadModule foo_module modules/mod_foo.so # LoadModule actions_module modules/mod_actions.so LoadModule alias_module modules/mod_alias.so LoadModule asis_module modules/mod_asis.so LoadModule auth_basic_module modules/mod_auth_basic.so #LoadModule auth_digest_module modules/mod_auth_digest.so #LoadModule authn_alias_module modules/mod_authn_alias.so #LoadModule authn_anon_module modules/mod_authn_anon.so #LoadModule authn_dbd_module modules/mod_authn_dbd.so #LoadModule authn_dbm_module modules/mod_authn_dbm.so LoadModule authn_default_module modules/mod_authn_default.so LoadModule authn_file_module modules/mod_authn_file.so #LoadModule authnz_ldap_module modules/mod_authnz_ldap.so #LoadModule authz_dbm_module modules/mod_authz_dbm.so LoadModule authz_default_module modules/mod_authz_default.so LoadModule authz_groupfile_module modules/mod_authz_groupfile.so LoadModule authz_host_module modules/mod_authz_host.so #LoadModule authz_owner_module modules/mod_authz_owner.so LoadModule authz_user_module modules/mod_authz_user.so LoadModule autoindex_module modules/mod_autoindex.so #LoadModule cache_module modules/mod_cache.so #LoadModule cern_meta_module modules/mod_cern_meta.so LoadModule cgi_module modules/mod_cgi.so #LoadModule charset_lite_module modules/mod_charset_lite.so #LoadModule dav_module modules/mod_dav.so #LoadModule dav_fs_module modules/mod_dav_fs.so #LoadModule dav_lock_module modules/mod_dav_lock.so #LoadModule dbd_module modules/mod_dbd.so #LoadModule deflate_module modules/mod_deflate.so LoadModule dir_module modules/mod_dir.so #LoadModule disk_cache_module modules/mod_disk_cache.so #LoadModule dumpio_module modules/mod_dumpio.so LoadModule env_module modules/mod_env.so #LoadModule expires_module modules/mod_expires.so #LoadModule ext_filter_module modules/mod_ext_filter.so #LoadModule file_cache_module modules/mod_file_cache.so #LoadModule filter_module modules/mod_filter.so #LoadModule headers_module modules/mod_headers.so #LoadModule ident_module modules/mod_ident.so #LoadModule imagemap_module modules/mod_imagemap.so LoadModule include_module modules/mod_include.so LoadModule info_module modules/mod_info.so LoadModule isapi_module modules/mod_isapi.so #LoadModule ldap_module modules/mod_ldap.so #LoadModule logio_module modules/mod_logio.so LoadModule log_config_module modules/mod_log_config.so #LoadModule log_forensic_module modules/mod_log_forensic.so #LoadModule mem_cache_module modules/mod_mem_cache.so LoadModule mime_module modules/mod_mime.so #LoadModule mime_magic_module modules/mod_mime_magic.so LoadModule negotiation_module modules/mod_negotiation.so #LoadModule proxy_module modules/mod_proxy.so #LoadModule proxy_ajp_module modules/mod_proxy_ajp.so #LoadModule proxy_balancer_module modules/mod_proxy_balancer.so #LoadModule proxy_connect_module modules/mod_proxy_connect.so #LoadModule proxy_ftp_module modules/mod_proxy_ftp.so #LoadModule proxy_http_module modules/mod_proxy_http.so #LoadModule reqtimeout_module modules/mod_reqtimeout.so #LoadModule rewrite_module modules/mod_rewrite.so LoadModule setenvif_module modules/mod_setenvif.so #LoadModule speling_module modules/mod_speling.so #LoadModule ssl_module modules/mod_ssl.so LoadModule status_module modules/mod_status.so #LoadModule substitute_module modules/mod_substitute.so #LoadModule unique_id_module modules/mod_unique_id.so #LoadModule userdir_module modules/mod_userdir.so #LoadModule usertrack_module modules/mod_usertrack.so #LoadModule version_module modules/mod_version.so #LoadModule vhost_alias_module modules/mod_vhost_alias.so #LoadModule php5_module "c:/php/php5apache2_2.dll" <IfModule !mpm_netware_module> <IfModule !mpm_winnt_module> # # If you wish httpd to run as a different user or group, you must run # httpd as root initially and it will switch. # # User/Group: The name (or #number) of the user/group to run httpd as. # It is usually good practice to create a dedicated user and group for # running httpd, as with most system services. # User daemon Group daemon </IfModule> </IfModule> # 'Main' server configuration # # The directives in this section set up the values used by the 'main' # server, which responds to any requests that aren't handled by a # <VirtualHost> definition. These values also provide defaults for # any <VirtualHost> containers you may define later in the file. # # All of these directives may appear inside <VirtualHost> containers, # in which case these default settings will be overridden for the # virtual host being defined. # # # ServerAdmin: Your address, where problems with the server should be # e-mailed. This address appears on some server-generated pages, such # as error documents. e.g. [email protected] # ServerAdmin [email protected] # # ServerName gives the name and port that the server uses to identify itself. # This can often be determined automatically, but we recommend you specify # it explicitly to prevent problems during startup. # # If your host doesn't have a registered DNS name, enter its IP address here. # #ServerName :80 # # DocumentRoot: The directory out of which you will serve your # documents. By default, all requests are taken from this directory, but # symbolic links and aliases may be used to point to other locations. # DocumentRoot "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2/htdocs" # # Each directory to which Apache has access can be configured with respect # to which services and features are allowed and/or disabled in that # directory (and its subdirectories). # # First, we configure the "default" to be a very restrictive set of # features. # <Directory /> Options FollowSymLinks AllowOverride None Order deny,allow Allow from all </Directory> # # Note that from this point forward you must specifically allow # particular features to be enabled - so if something's not working as # you might expect, make sure that you have specifically enabled it # below. # # # This should be changed to whatever you set DocumentRoot to. # <Directory "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2/htdocs"> # # Possible values for the Options directive are "None", "All", # or any combination of: # Indexes Includes FollowSymLinks SymLinksifOwnerMatch ExecCGI MultiViews # # Note that "MultiViews" must be named *explicitly* --- "Options All" # doesn't give it to you. # # The Options directive is both complicated and important. Please see # http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/mod/core.html#options # for more information. # Options Indexes FollowSymLinks # # AllowOverride controls what directives may be placed in .htaccess files. # It can be "All", "None", or any combination of the keywords: # Options FileInfo AuthConfig Limit # AllowOverride All # # Controls who can get stuff from this server. # Order deny,allow Allow from all </Directory> # # DirectoryIndex: sets the file that Apache will serve if a directory # is requested. # <IfModule dir_module> DirectoryIndex index.html index.php index.phtml index.htm default.html default.php default.phtml default.htm </IfModule> # # The following lines prevent .htaccess and .htpasswd files from being # viewed by Web clients. # <FilesMatch "^\.ht"> Order allow,deny Deny from all Satisfy All </FilesMatch> # # ErrorLog: The location of the error log file. # If you do not specify an ErrorLog directive within a <VirtualHost> # container, error messages relating to that virtual host will be # logged here. If you *do* define an error logfile for a <VirtualHost> # container, that host's errors will be logged there and not here. # ErrorLog "logs/error.log" # # LogLevel: Control the number of messages logged to the error_log. # Possible values include: debug, info, notice, warn, error, crit, # alert, emerg. # LogLevel warn <IfModule log_config_module> # # The following directives define some format nicknames for use with # a CustomLog directive (see below). # LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b \"%{Referer}i\" \"%{User-Agent}i\"" combined LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b" common <IfModule logio_module> # You need to enable mod_logio.c to use %I and %O LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b \"%{Referer}i\" \"%{User-Agent}i\" %I %O" combinedio </IfModule> # # The location and format of the access logfile (Common Logfile Format). # If you do not define any access logfiles within a <VirtualHost> # container, they will be logged here. Contrariwise, if you *do* # define per-<VirtualHost> access logfiles, transactions will be # logged therein and *not* in this file. # CustomLog "logs/access.log" common # # If you prefer a logfile with access, agent, and referer information # (Combined Logfile Format) you can use the following directive. # #CustomLog "logs/access.log" combined </IfModule> <IfModule alias_module> # # Redirect: Allows you to tell clients about documents that used to # exist in your server's namespace, but do not anymore. The client # will make a new request for the document at its new location. # Example: # Redirect permanent /foo http:///bar # # Alias: Maps web paths into filesystem paths and is used to # access content that does not live under the DocumentRoot. # Example: # Alias /webpath /full/filesystem/path # # If you include a trailing / on /webpath then the server will # require it to be present in the URL. You will also likely # need to provide a <Directory> section to allow access to # the filesystem path. # # ScriptAlias: This controls which directories contain server scripts. # ScriptAliases are essentially the same as Aliases, except that # documents in the target directory are treated as applications and # run by the server when requested rather than as documents sent to the # client. The same rules about trailing "/" apply to ScriptAlias # directives as to Alias. # ScriptAlias /cgi-bin/ "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2/cgi-bin/" </IfModule> <IfModule cgid_module> # # ScriptSock: On threaded servers, designate the path to the UNIX # socket used to communicate with the CGI daemon of mod_cgid. # #Scriptsock logs/cgisock </IfModule> # # "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2/cgi-bin" should be changed to whatever your ScriptAliased # CGI directory exists, if you have that configured. # <Directory "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2/cgi-bin"> AllowOverride None Options None Order allow,deny Allow from all </Directory> # # DefaultType: the default MIME type the server will use for a document # if it cannot otherwise determine one, such as from filename extensions. # If your server contains mostly text or HTML documents, "text/plain" is # a good value. If most of your content is binary, such as applications # or images, you may want to use "application/octet-stream" instead to # keep browsers from trying to display binary files as though they are # text. # DefaultType text/plain <IfModule mime_module> # # TypesConfig points to the file containing the list of mappings from # filename extension to MIME-type. # TypesConfig conf/mime.types # # AddType allows you to add to or override the MIME configuration # file specified in TypesConfig for specific file types. # #AddType application/x-gzip .tgz # # AddEncoding allows you to have certain browsers uncompress # information on the fly. Note: Not all browsers support this. # #AddEncoding x-compress .Z #AddEncoding x-gzip .gz .tgz # # If the AddEncoding directives above are commented-out, then you # probably should define those extensions to indicate media types: # AddType application/x-compress .Z AddType application/x-gzip .gz .tgz # # AddHandler allows you to map certain file extensions to "handlers": # actions unrelated to filetype. These can be either built into the server # or added with the Action directive (see below) # # To use CGI scripts outside of ScriptAliased directories: # (You will also need to add "ExecCGI" to the "Options" directive.) # #AddHandler cgi-script .cgi # For type maps (negotiated resources): #AddHandler type-map var # # Filters allow you to process content before it is sent to the client. # # To parse .shtml files for server-side includes (SSI): # (You will also need to add "Includes" to the "Options" directive.) # #AddType text/html .shtml #AddOutputFilter INCLUDES .shtml AddType application/x-httpd-php .php AddType application/x-httpd-php .phtml </IfModule> # # The mod_mime_magic module allows the server to use various hints from the # contents of the file itself to determine its type. The MIMEMagicFile # directive tells the module where the hint definitions are located. # #MIMEMagicFile conf/magic # # Customizable error responses come in three flavors: # 1) plain text 2) local redirects 3) external redirects # # Some examples: #ErrorDocument 500 "The server made a boo boo." #ErrorDocument 404 /missing.html #ErrorDocument 404 "/cgi-bin/missing_handler.pl" #ErrorDocument 402 http:///subscription_info.html # # # EnableMMAP and EnableSendfile: On systems that support it, # memory-mapping or the sendfile syscall is used to deliver # files. This usually improves server performance, but must # be turned off when serving from networked-mounted # filesystems or if support for these functions is otherwise # broken on your system. # #EnableMMAP off #EnableSendfile off # Supplemental configuration # # The configuration files in the conf/extra/ directory can be # included to add extra features or to modify the default configuration of # the server, or you may simply copy their contents here and change as # necessary. # Server-pool management (MPM specific) #Include conf/extra/httpd-mpm.conf # Multi-language error messages #Include conf/extra/httpd-multilang-errordoc.conf # Fancy directory listings #Include conf/extra/httpd-autoindex.conf # Language settings #Include conf/extra/httpd-languages.conf # User home directories #Include conf/extra/httpd-userdir.conf # Real-time info on requests and configuration #Include conf/extra/httpd-info.conf # Virtual hosts #Include conf/extra/httpd-vhosts.conf # Local access to the Apache HTTP Server Manual #Include conf/extra/httpd-manual.conf # Distributed authoring and versioning (WebDAV) #Include conf/extra/httpd-dav.conf # Various default settings #Include conf/extra/httpd-default.conf # Secure (SSL/TLS) connections #Include conf/extra/httpd-ssl.conf # # Note: The following must must be present to support # starting without SSL on platforms with no /dev/random equivalent # but a statically compiled-in mod_ssl. # <IfModule ssl_module> SSLRandomSeed startup builtin SSLRandomSeed connect builtin </IfModule> #PHPIniDir "c:/php" #BEGIN PHP INSTALLER EDITS - REMOVE ONLY ON UNINSTALL PHPIniDir "C:/PHP/" LoadModule php5_module "C:/PHP/php5apache2_2.dll" #END PHP INSTALLER EDITS - REMOVE ONLY ON UNINSTALL P.S sorry for the shortness of this post. I am in a rush

    Read the article

  • Apache won't accept external requests

    - by Eric
    I am running Apache 2.2 on windows and I would like to access it remotely. Currently I can only access it from my local machine. I know the problem is not port forwarding because I tested it with other web servers (written in python). My httpd.conf file is below. I installed apache with the PHP installer. # # This is the main Apache HTTP server configuration file. It contains the # configuration directives that give the server its instructions. # See <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2> for detailed information. # In particular, see # <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/mod/directives.html> # for a discussion of each configuration directive. # # Do NOT simply read the instructions in here without understanding # what they do. They're here only as hints or reminders. If you are unsure # consult the online docs. You have been warned. # # Configuration and logfile names: If the filenames you specify for many # of the server's control files begin with "/" (or "drive:/" for Win32), the # server will use that explicit path. If the filenames do *not* begin # with "/", the value of ServerRoot is prepended -- so "logs/foo.log" # with ServerRoot set to "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2" will be interpreted by the # server as "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2/logs/foo.log". # # NOTE: Where filenames are specified, you must use forward slashes # instead of backslashes (e.g., "c:/apache" instead of "c:\apache"). # If a drive letter is omitted, the drive on which httpd.exe is located # will be used by default. It is recommended that you always supply # an explicit drive letter in absolute paths to avoid confusion. # # ServerRoot: The top of the directory tree under which the server's # configuration, error, and log files are kept. # # Do not add a slash at the end of the directory path. If you point # ServerRoot at a non-local disk, be sure to point the LockFile directive # at a local disk. If you wish to share the same ServerRoot for multiple # httpd daemons, you will need to change at least LockFile and PidFile. # ServerRoot "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2" # # Listen: Allows you to bind Apache to specific IP addresses and/or # ports, instead of the default. See also the <VirtualHost> # directive. # # Change this to Listen on specific IP addresses as shown below to # prevent Apache from glomming onto all bound IP addresses. # #Listen 12.34.56.78:80 Listen 80 # # Dynamic Shared Object (DSO) Support # # To be able to use the functionality of a module which was built as a DSO you # have to place corresponding `LoadModule' lines at this location so the # directives contained in it are actually available _before_ they are used. # Statically compiled modules (those listed by `httpd -l') do not need # to be loaded here. # # Example: # LoadModule foo_module modules/mod_foo.so # LoadModule actions_module modules/mod_actions.so LoadModule alias_module modules/mod_alias.so LoadModule asis_module modules/mod_asis.so LoadModule auth_basic_module modules/mod_auth_basic.so #LoadModule auth_digest_module modules/mod_auth_digest.so #LoadModule authn_alias_module modules/mod_authn_alias.so #LoadModule authn_anon_module modules/mod_authn_anon.so #LoadModule authn_dbd_module modules/mod_authn_dbd.so #LoadModule authn_dbm_module modules/mod_authn_dbm.so LoadModule authn_default_module modules/mod_authn_default.so LoadModule authn_file_module modules/mod_authn_file.so #LoadModule authnz_ldap_module modules/mod_authnz_ldap.so #LoadModule authz_dbm_module modules/mod_authz_dbm.so LoadModule authz_default_module modules/mod_authz_default.so LoadModule authz_groupfile_module modules/mod_authz_groupfile.so LoadModule authz_host_module modules/mod_authz_host.so #LoadModule authz_owner_module modules/mod_authz_owner.so LoadModule authz_user_module modules/mod_authz_user.so LoadModule autoindex_module modules/mod_autoindex.so #LoadModule cache_module modules/mod_cache.so #LoadModule cern_meta_module modules/mod_cern_meta.so LoadModule cgi_module modules/mod_cgi.so #LoadModule charset_lite_module modules/mod_charset_lite.so #LoadModule dav_module modules/mod_dav.so #LoadModule dav_fs_module modules/mod_dav_fs.so #LoadModule dav_lock_module modules/mod_dav_lock.so #LoadModule dbd_module modules/mod_dbd.so #LoadModule deflate_module modules/mod_deflate.so LoadModule dir_module modules/mod_dir.so #LoadModule disk_cache_module modules/mod_disk_cache.so #LoadModule dumpio_module modules/mod_dumpio.so LoadModule env_module modules/mod_env.so #LoadModule expires_module modules/mod_expires.so #LoadModule ext_filter_module modules/mod_ext_filter.so #LoadModule file_cache_module modules/mod_file_cache.so #LoadModule filter_module modules/mod_filter.so #LoadModule headers_module modules/mod_headers.so #LoadModule ident_module modules/mod_ident.so #LoadModule imagemap_module modules/mod_imagemap.so LoadModule include_module modules/mod_include.so LoadModule info_module modules/mod_info.so LoadModule isapi_module modules/mod_isapi.so #LoadModule ldap_module modules/mod_ldap.so #LoadModule logio_module modules/mod_logio.so LoadModule log_config_module modules/mod_log_config.so #LoadModule log_forensic_module modules/mod_log_forensic.so #LoadModule mem_cache_module modules/mod_mem_cache.so LoadModule mime_module modules/mod_mime.so #LoadModule mime_magic_module modules/mod_mime_magic.so LoadModule negotiation_module modules/mod_negotiation.so #LoadModule proxy_module modules/mod_proxy.so #LoadModule proxy_ajp_module modules/mod_proxy_ajp.so #LoadModule proxy_balancer_module modules/mod_proxy_balancer.so #LoadModule proxy_connect_module modules/mod_proxy_connect.so #LoadModule proxy_ftp_module modules/mod_proxy_ftp.so #LoadModule proxy_http_module modules/mod_proxy_http.so #LoadModule reqtimeout_module modules/mod_reqtimeout.so #LoadModule rewrite_module modules/mod_rewrite.so LoadModule setenvif_module modules/mod_setenvif.so #LoadModule speling_module modules/mod_speling.so #LoadModule ssl_module modules/mod_ssl.so LoadModule status_module modules/mod_status.so #LoadModule substitute_module modules/mod_substitute.so #LoadModule unique_id_module modules/mod_unique_id.so #LoadModule userdir_module modules/mod_userdir.so #LoadModule usertrack_module modules/mod_usertrack.so #LoadModule version_module modules/mod_version.so #LoadModule vhost_alias_module modules/mod_vhost_alias.so #LoadModule php5_module "c:/php/php5apache2_2.dll" <IfModule !mpm_netware_module> <IfModule !mpm_winnt_module> # # If you wish httpd to run as a different user or group, you must run # httpd as root initially and it will switch. # # User/Group: The name (or #number) of the user/group to run httpd as. # It is usually good practice to create a dedicated user and group for # running httpd, as with most system services. # User daemon Group daemon </IfModule> </IfModule> # 'Main' server configuration # # The directives in this section set up the values used by the 'main' # server, which responds to any requests that aren't handled by a # <VirtualHost> definition. These values also provide defaults for # any <VirtualHost> containers you may define later in the file. # # All of these directives may appear inside <VirtualHost> containers, # in which case these default settings will be overridden for the # virtual host being defined. # # # ServerAdmin: Your address, where problems with the server should be # e-mailed. This address appears on some server-generated pages, such # as error documents. e.g. [email protected] # ServerAdmin [email protected] # # ServerName gives the name and port that the server uses to identify itself. # This can often be determined automatically, but we recommend you specify # it explicitly to prevent problems during startup. # # If your host doesn't have a registered DNS name, enter its IP address here. # #ServerName :80 # # DocumentRoot: The directory out of which you will serve your # documents. By default, all requests are taken from this directory, but # symbolic links and aliases may be used to point to other locations. # DocumentRoot "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2/htdocs" # # Each directory to which Apache has access can be configured with respect # to which services and features are allowed and/or disabled in that # directory (and its subdirectories). # # First, we configure the "default" to be a very restrictive set of # features. # <Directory /> Options FollowSymLinks AllowOverride None Order deny,allow Allow from all </Directory> # # Note that from this point forward you must specifically allow # particular features to be enabled - so if something's not working as # you might expect, make sure that you have specifically enabled it # below. # # # This should be changed to whatever you set DocumentRoot to. # <Directory "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2/htdocs"> # # Possible values for the Options directive are "None", "All", # or any combination of: # Indexes Includes FollowSymLinks SymLinksifOwnerMatch ExecCGI MultiViews # # Note that "MultiViews" must be named *explicitly* --- "Options All" # doesn't give it to you. # # The Options directive is both complicated and important. Please see # http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/mod/core.html#options # for more information. # Options Indexes FollowSymLinks # # AllowOverride controls what directives may be placed in .htaccess files. # It can be "All", "None", or any combination of the keywords: # Options FileInfo AuthConfig Limit # AllowOverride All # # Controls who can get stuff from this server. # Order deny,allow Allow from all </Directory> # # DirectoryIndex: sets the file that Apache will serve if a directory # is requested. # <IfModule dir_module> DirectoryIndex index.html index.php index.phtml index.htm default.html default.php default.phtml default.htm </IfModule> # # The following lines prevent .htaccess and .htpasswd files from being # viewed by Web clients. # <FilesMatch "^\.ht"> Order allow,deny Deny from all Satisfy All </FilesMatch> # # ErrorLog: The location of the error log file. # If you do not specify an ErrorLog directive within a <VirtualHost> # container, error messages relating to that virtual host will be # logged here. If you *do* define an error logfile for a <VirtualHost> # container, that host's errors will be logged there and not here. # ErrorLog "logs/error.log" # # LogLevel: Control the number of messages logged to the error_log. # Possible values include: debug, info, notice, warn, error, crit, # alert, emerg. # LogLevel warn <IfModule log_config_module> # # The following directives define some format nicknames for use with # a CustomLog directive (see below). # LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b \"%{Referer}i\" \"%{User-Agent}i\"" combined LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b" common <IfModule logio_module> # You need to enable mod_logio.c to use %I and %O LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b \"%{Referer}i\" \"%{User-Agent}i\" %I %O" combinedio </IfModule> # # The location and format of the access logfile (Common Logfile Format). # If you do not define any access logfiles within a <VirtualHost> # container, they will be logged here. Contrariwise, if you *do* # define per-<VirtualHost> access logfiles, transactions will be # logged therein and *not* in this file. # CustomLog "logs/access.log" common # # If you prefer a logfile with access, agent, and referer information # (Combined Logfile Format) you can use the following directive. # #CustomLog "logs/access.log" combined </IfModule> <IfModule alias_module> # # Redirect: Allows you to tell clients about documents that used to # exist in your server's namespace, but do not anymore. The client # will make a new request for the document at its new location. # Example: # Redirect permanent /foo http:///bar # # Alias: Maps web paths into filesystem paths and is used to # access content that does not live under the DocumentRoot. # Example: # Alias /webpath /full/filesystem/path # # If you include a trailing / on /webpath then the server will # require it to be present in the URL. You will also likely # need to provide a <Directory> section to allow access to # the filesystem path. # # ScriptAlias: This controls which directories contain server scripts. # ScriptAliases are essentially the same as Aliases, except that # documents in the target directory are treated as applications and # run by the server when requested rather than as documents sent to the # client. The same rules about trailing "/" apply to ScriptAlias # directives as to Alias. # ScriptAlias /cgi-bin/ "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2/cgi-bin/" </IfModule> <IfModule cgid_module> # # ScriptSock: On threaded servers, designate the path to the UNIX # socket used to communicate with the CGI daemon of mod_cgid. # #Scriptsock logs/cgisock </IfModule> # # "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2/cgi-bin" should be changed to whatever your ScriptAliased # CGI directory exists, if you have that configured. # <Directory "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2/cgi-bin"> AllowOverride None Options None Order allow,deny Allow from all </Directory> # # DefaultType: the default MIME type the server will use for a document # if it cannot otherwise determine one, such as from filename extensions. # If your server contains mostly text or HTML documents, "text/plain" is # a good value. If most of your content is binary, such as applications # or images, you may want to use "application/octet-stream" instead to # keep browsers from trying to display binary files as though they are # text. # DefaultType text/plain <IfModule mime_module> # # TypesConfig points to the file containing the list of mappings from # filename extension to MIME-type. # TypesConfig conf/mime.types # # AddType allows you to add to or override the MIME configuration # file specified in TypesConfig for specific file types. # #AddType application/x-gzip .tgz # # AddEncoding allows you to have certain browsers uncompress # information on the fly. Note: Not all browsers support this. # #AddEncoding x-compress .Z #AddEncoding x-gzip .gz .tgz # # If the AddEncoding directives above are commented-out, then you # probably should define those extensions to indicate media types: # AddType application/x-compress .Z AddType application/x-gzip .gz .tgz # # AddHandler allows you to map certain file extensions to "handlers": # actions unrelated to filetype. These can be either built into the server # or added with the Action directive (see below) # # To use CGI scripts outside of ScriptAliased directories: # (You will also need to add "ExecCGI" to the "Options" directive.) # #AddHandler cgi-script .cgi # For type maps (negotiated resources): #AddHandler type-map var # # Filters allow you to process content before it is sent to the client. # # To parse .shtml files for server-side includes (SSI): # (You will also need to add "Includes" to the "Options" directive.) # #AddType text/html .shtml #AddOutputFilter INCLUDES .shtml AddType application/x-httpd-php .php AddType application/x-httpd-php .phtml </IfModule> # # The mod_mime_magic module allows the server to use various hints from the # contents of the file itself to determine its type. The MIMEMagicFile # directive tells the module where the hint definitions are located. # #MIMEMagicFile conf/magic # # Customizable error responses come in three flavors: # 1) plain text 2) local redirects 3) external redirects # # Some examples: #ErrorDocument 500 "The server made a boo boo." #ErrorDocument 404 /missing.html #ErrorDocument 404 "/cgi-bin/missing_handler.pl" #ErrorDocument 402 http:///subscription_info.html # # # EnableMMAP and EnableSendfile: On systems that support it, # memory-mapping or the sendfile syscall is used to deliver # files. This usually improves server performance, but must # be turned off when serving from networked-mounted # filesystems or if support for these functions is otherwise # broken on your system. # #EnableMMAP off #EnableSendfile off # Supplemental configuration # # The configuration files in the conf/extra/ directory can be # included to add extra features or to modify the default configuration of # the server, or you may simply copy their contents here and change as # necessary. # Server-pool management (MPM specific) #Include conf/extra/httpd-mpm.conf # Multi-language error messages #Include conf/extra/httpd-multilang-errordoc.conf # Fancy directory listings #Include conf/extra/httpd-autoindex.conf # Language settings #Include conf/extra/httpd-languages.conf # User home directories #Include conf/extra/httpd-userdir.conf # Real-time info on requests and configuration #Include conf/extra/httpd-info.conf # Virtual hosts #Include conf/extra/httpd-vhosts.conf # Local access to the Apache HTTP Server Manual #Include conf/extra/httpd-manual.conf # Distributed authoring and versioning (WebDAV) #Include conf/extra/httpd-dav.conf # Various default settings #Include conf/extra/httpd-default.conf # Secure (SSL/TLS) connections #Include conf/extra/httpd-ssl.conf # # Note: The following must must be present to support # starting without SSL on platforms with no /dev/random equivalent # but a statically compiled-in mod_ssl. # <IfModule ssl_module> SSLRandomSeed startup builtin SSLRandomSeed connect builtin </IfModule> #PHPIniDir "c:/php" #BEGIN PHP INSTALLER EDITS - REMOVE ONLY ON UNINSTALL PHPIniDir "C:/PHP/" LoadModule php5_module "C:/PHP/php5apache2_2.dll" #END PHP INSTALLER EDITS - REMOVE ONLY ON UNINSTALL P.S sorry for the shortness of this post. I am in a rush

    Read the article

  • SQL SERVER – Securing TRUNCATE Permissions in SQL Server

    - by pinaldave
    Download the Script of this article from here. On December 11, 2010, Vinod Kumar, a Databases & BI technology evangelist from Microsoft Corporation, graced Ahmedabad by spending some time with the Community during the Community Tech Days (CTD) event. As he was running through a few demos, Vinod asked the audience one of the most fundamental and common interview questions – “What is the difference between a DELETE and TRUNCATE?“ Ahmedabad SQL Server User Group Expert Nakul Vachhrajani has come up with excellent solutions of the same. I must congratulate Nakul for this excellent solution and as a encouragement to User Group member, I am publishing the same article over here. Nakul Vachhrajani is a Software Specialist and systems development professional with Patni Computer Systems Limited. He has functional experience spanning legacy code deprecation, system design, documentation, development, implementation, testing, maintenance and support of complex systems, providing business intelligence solutions, database administration, performance tuning, optimization, product management, release engineering, process definition and implementation. He has comprehensive grasp on Database Administration, Development and Implementation with MS SQL Server and C, C++, Visual C++/C#. He has about 6 years of total experience in information technology. Nakul is an member of the Ahmedabad and Gandhinagar SQL Server User Groups, and actively contributes to the community by actively participating in multiple forums and websites like SQLAuthority.com, BeyondRelational.com, SQLServerCentral.com and many others. Please note: The opinions expressed herein are Nakul own personal opinions and do not represent his employer’s view in anyway. All data from everywhere here on Earth go through a series of  four distinct operations, identified by the words: CREATE, READ, UPDATE and DELETE, or simply, CRUD. Putting in Microsoft SQL Server terms, is the process goes like this: INSERT, SELECT, UPDATE and DELETE/TRUNCATE. Quite a few interesting responses were received and evaluated live during the session. To summarize them, the most important similarity that came out was that both DELETE and TRUNCATE participate in transactions. The major differences (not all) that came out of the exercise were: DELETE: DELETE supports a WHERE clause DELETE removes rows from a table, row-by-row Because DELETE moves row-by-row, it acquires a row-level lock Depending upon the recovery model of the database, DELETE is a fully-logged operation. Because DELETE moves row-by-row, it can fire off triggers TRUNCATE: TRUNCATE does not support a WHERE clause TRUNCATE works by directly removing the individual data pages of a table TRUNCATE directly occupies a table-level lock. (Because a lock is acquired, and because TRUNCATE can also participate in a transaction, it has to be a logged operation) TRUNCATE is, therefore, a minimally-logged operation; again, this depends upon the recovery model of the database Triggers are not fired when TRUNCATE is used (because individual row deletions are not logged) Finally, Vinod popped the big homework question that must be critically analyzed: “We know that we can restrict a DELETE operation to a particular user, but how can we restrict the TRUNCATE operation to a particular user?” After returning home and having a nice cup of coffee, I noticed that my gray cells immediately started to work. Below was the result of my research. As what is always said, the devil is in the details. Upon looking at the Permissions section for the TRUNCATE statement in Books On Line, the following jumps right out: “The minimum permission required is ALTER on table_name. TRUNCATE TABLE permissions default to the table owner, members of the sysadmin fixed server role, and the db_owner and db_ddladmin fixed database roles, and are not transferable. However, you can incorporate the TRUNCATE TABLE statement within a module, such as a stored procedure, and grant appropriate permissions to the module using the EXECUTE AS clause.“ Now, what does this mean? Unlike DELETE, one cannot directly assign permissions to a user/set of users allowing or revoking TRUNCATE rights. However, there is a way to circumvent this. It is important to recall that in Microsoft SQL Server, database engine security surrounds the concept of a “securable”, which is any object like a table, stored procedure, trigger, etc. Rights are assigned to a principal on a securable. Refer to the image below (taken from the SQL Server Books On Line). urable”, which is any object like a table, stored procedure, trigger, etc. Rights are assigned to a principal on a securable. Refer to the image below (taken from the SQL Server Books On Line). SETTING UP THE ENVIRONMENT – (01A_Truncate Table Permissions.sql) Script Provided at the end of the article. By the end of this demo, one will be able to do all the CRUD operations, except the TRUNCATE, and the other will only be able to execute the TRUNCATE. All you will need for this test is any edition of SQL Server 2008. (With minor changes, these scripts can be made to work with SQL 2005.) We begin by creating the following: 1.       A test database 2.        Two database roles: associated logins and users 3.       Switch over to the test database and create a test table. Then, add some data into it. I am using row constructors, which is new to SQL 2008. Creating the modules that will be used to enforce permissions 1.       We have already created one of the modules that we will be assigning permissions to. That module is the table: TruncatePermissionsTest 2.       We will now create two stored procedures; one is for the DELETE operation and the other for the TRUNCATE operation. Please note that for all practical purposes, the end result is the same – all data from the table TruncatePermissionsTest is removed Assigning the permissions Now comes the most important part of the demonstration – assigning permissions. A permissions matrix can be worked out as under: To apply the security rights, we use the GRANT and DENY clauses, as under: That’s it! We are now ready for our big test! THE TEST (01B_Truncate Table Test Queries.sql) Script Provided at the end of the article. I will now need two separate SSMS connections, one with the login AllowedTruncate and the other with the login RestrictedTruncate. Running the test is simple; all that’s required is to run through the script – 01B_Truncate Table Test Queries.sql. What I will demonstrate here via screen-shots is the behavior of SQL Server when logged in as the AllowedTruncate user. There are a few other combinations than what are highlighted here. I will leave the reader the right to explore the behavior of the RestrictedTruncate user and these additional scenarios, as a form of self-study. 1.       Testing SELECT permissions 2.       Testing TRUNCATE permissions (Remember, “deny by default”?) 3.       Trying to circumvent security by trying to TRUNCATE the table using the stored procedure Hence, we have now proved that a user can indeed be assigned permissions to specifically assign TRUNCATE permissions. I also hope that the above has sparked curiosity towards putting some security around the probably “destructive” operations of DELETE and TRUNCATE. I would like to wish each and every one of the readers a very happy and secure time with Microsoft SQL Server. (Please find the scripts – 01A_Truncate Table Permissions.sql and 01B_Truncate Table Test Queries.sql that have been used in this demonstration. Please note that these scripts contain purely test-level code only. These scripts must not, at any cost, be used in the reader’s production environments). 01A_Truncate Table Permissions.sql /* ***************************************************************************************************************** Developed By          : Nakul Vachhrajani Functionality         : This demo is focused on how to allow only TRUNCATE permissions to a particular user How to Use            : 1. Run through, step-by-step through the sequence till Step 08 to create a test database 2. Switch over to the "Truncate Table Test Queries.sql" and execute it step-by-step in two different SSMS windows, one where you have logged in as 'RestrictedTruncate', and the other as 'AllowedTruncate' 3. Come back to "Truncate Table Permissions.sql" 4. Execute Step 10 to cleanup! Modifications         : December 13, 2010 - NAV - Updated to add a security matrix and improve code readability when applying security December 12, 2010 - NAV - Created ***************************************************************************************************************** */ -- Step 01: Create a new test database CREATE DATABASE TruncateTestDB GO USE TruncateTestDB GO -- Step 02: Add roles and users to demonstrate the security of the Truncate operation -- 2a. Create the new roles CREATE ROLE AllowedTruncateRole; GO CREATE ROLE RestrictedTruncateRole; GO -- 2b. Create new logins CREATE LOGIN AllowedTruncate WITH PASSWORD = 'truncate@2010', CHECK_POLICY = ON GO CREATE LOGIN RestrictedTruncate WITH PASSWORD = 'truncate@2010', CHECK_POLICY = ON GO -- 2c. Create new Users using the roles and logins created aboave CREATE USER TruncateUser FOR LOGIN AllowedTruncate WITH DEFAULT_SCHEMA = dbo GO CREATE USER NoTruncateUser FOR LOGIN RestrictedTruncate WITH DEFAULT_SCHEMA = dbo GO -- 2d. Add the newly created login to the newly created role sp_addrolemember 'AllowedTruncateRole','TruncateUser' GO sp_addrolemember 'RestrictedTruncateRole','NoTruncateUser' GO -- Step 03: Change over to the test database USE TruncateTestDB GO -- Step 04: Create a test table within the test databse CREATE TABLE TruncatePermissionsTest (Id INT IDENTITY(1,1), Name NVARCHAR(50)) GO -- Step 05: Populate the required data INSERT INTO TruncatePermissionsTest VALUES (N'Delhi'), (N'Mumbai'), (N'Ahmedabad') GO -- Step 06: Encapsulate the DELETE within another module CREATE PROCEDURE proc_DeleteMyTable WITH EXECUTE AS SELF AS DELETE FROM TruncateTestDB..TruncatePermissionsTest GO -- Step 07: Encapsulate the TRUNCATE within another module CREATE PROCEDURE proc_TruncateMyTable WITH EXECUTE AS SELF AS TRUNCATE TABLE TruncateTestDB..TruncatePermissionsTest GO -- Step 08: Apply Security /* *****************************SECURITY MATRIX*************************************** =================================================================================== Object                   | Permissions |                 Login |             | AllowedTruncate   |   RestrictedTruncate |             |User:NoTruncateUser|   User:TruncateUser =================================================================================== TruncatePermissionsTest  | SELECT,     |      GRANT        |      (Default) | INSERT,     |                   | | UPDATE,     |                   | | DELETE      |                   | -------------------------+-------------+-------------------+----------------------- TruncatePermissionsTest  | ALTER       |      DENY         |      (Default) -------------------------+-------------+----*/----------------+----------------------- proc_DeleteMyTable | EXECUTE | GRANT | DENY -------------------------+-------------+-------------------+----------------------- proc_TruncateMyTable | EXECUTE | DENY | GRANT -------------------------+-------------+-------------------+----------------------- *****************************SECURITY MATRIX*************************************** */ /* Table: TruncatePermissionsTest*/ GRANT SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE ON TruncateTestDB..TruncatePermissionsTest TO NoTruncateUser GO DENY ALTER ON TruncateTestDB..TruncatePermissionsTest TO NoTruncateUser GO /* Procedure: proc_DeleteMyTable*/ GRANT EXECUTE ON TruncateTestDB..proc_DeleteMyTable TO NoTruncateUser GO DENY EXECUTE ON TruncateTestDB..proc_DeleteMyTable TO TruncateUser GO /* Procedure: proc_TruncateMyTable*/ DENY EXECUTE ON TruncateTestDB..proc_TruncateMyTable TO NoTruncateUser GO GRANT EXECUTE ON TruncateTestDB..proc_TruncateMyTable TO TruncateUser GO -- Step 09: Test --Switch over to the "Truncate Table Test Queries.sql" and execute it step-by-step in two different SSMS windows: --    1. one where you have logged in as 'RestrictedTruncate', and --    2. the other as 'AllowedTruncate' -- Step 10: Cleanup sp_droprolemember 'AllowedTruncateRole','TruncateUser' GO sp_droprolemember 'RestrictedTruncateRole','NoTruncateUser' GO DROP USER TruncateUser GO DROP USER NoTruncateUser GO DROP LOGIN AllowedTruncate GO DROP LOGIN RestrictedTruncate GO DROP ROLE AllowedTruncateRole GO DROP ROLE RestrictedTruncateRole GO USE MASTER GO DROP DATABASE TruncateTestDB GO 01B_Truncate Table Test Queries.sql /* ***************************************************************************************************************** Developed By          : Nakul Vachhrajani Functionality         : This demo is focused on how to allow only TRUNCATE permissions to a particular user How to Use            : 1. Switch over to this from "Truncate Table Permissions.sql", Step #09 2. Execute this step-by-step in two different SSMS windows a. One where you have logged in as 'RestrictedTruncate', and b. The other as 'AllowedTruncate' 3. Return back to "Truncate Table Permissions.sql" 4. Execute Step 10 to cleanup! Modifications         : December 12, 2010 - NAV - Created ***************************************************************************************************************** */ -- Step 09A: Switch to the test database USE TruncateTestDB GO -- Step 09B: Ensure that we have valid data SELECT * FROM TruncatePermissionsTest GO -- (Expected: Following error will occur if logged in as "AllowedTruncate") -- Msg 229, Level 14, State 5, Line 1 -- The SELECT permission was denied on the object 'TruncatePermissionsTest', database 'TruncateTestDB', schema 'dbo'. --Step 09C: Attempt to Truncate Data from the table without using the stored procedure TRUNCATE TABLE TruncatePermissionsTest GO -- (Expected: Following error will occur) --  Msg 1088, Level 16, State 7, Line 2 --  Cannot find the object "TruncatePermissionsTest" because it does not exist or you do not have permissions. -- Step 09D:Regenerate Test Data INSERT INTO TruncatePermissionsTest VALUES (N'London'), (N'Paris'), (N'Berlin') GO -- (Expected: Following error will occur if logged in as "AllowedTruncate") -- Msg 229, Level 14, State 5, Line 1 -- The INSERT permission was denied on the object 'TruncatePermissionsTest', database 'TruncateTestDB', schema 'dbo'. --Step 09E: Attempt to Truncate Data from the table using the stored procedure EXEC proc_TruncateMyTable GO -- (Expected: Will execute successfully with 'AllowedTruncate' user, will error out as under with 'RestrictedTruncate') -- Msg 229, Level 14, State 5, Procedure proc_TruncateMyTable, Line 1 -- The EXECUTE permission was denied on the object 'proc_TruncateMyTable', database 'TruncateTestDB', schema 'dbo'. -- Step 09F:Regenerate Test Data INSERT INTO TruncatePermissionsTest VALUES (N'Madrid'), (N'Rome'), (N'Athens') GO --Step 09G: Attempt to Delete Data from the table without using the stored procedure DELETE FROM TruncatePermissionsTest GO -- (Expected: Following error will occur if logged in as "AllowedTruncate") -- Msg 229, Level 14, State 5, Line 2 -- The DELETE permission was denied on the object 'TruncatePermissionsTest', database 'TruncateTestDB', schema 'dbo'. -- Step 09H:Regenerate Test Data INSERT INTO TruncatePermissionsTest VALUES (N'Spain'), (N'Italy'), (N'Greece') GO --Step 09I: Attempt to Delete Data from the table using the stored procedure EXEC proc_DeleteMyTable GO -- (Expected: Following error will occur if logged in as "AllowedTruncate") -- Msg 229, Level 14, State 5, Procedure proc_DeleteMyTable, Line 1 -- The EXECUTE permission was denied on the object 'proc_DeleteMyTable', database 'TruncateTestDB', schema 'dbo'. --Step 09J: Close this SSMS window and return back to "Truncate Table Permissions.sql" Thank you Nakul to take up the challenge and prove that Ahmedabad and Gandhinagar SQL Server User Group has talent to solve difficult problems. Reference: Pinal Dave (http://blog.SQLAuthority.com) Filed under: Best Practices, Pinal Dave, Readers Contribution, Readers Question, SQL, SQL Authority, SQL Query, SQL Scripts, SQL Security, SQL Server, SQL Tips and Tricks, T SQL, Technology

    Read the article

  • What’s new in ASP.NET 4.0: Core Features

    - by Rick Strahl
    Microsoft released the .NET Runtime 4.0 and with it comes a brand spanking new version of ASP.NET – version 4.0 – which provides an incremental set of improvements to an already powerful platform. .NET 4.0 is a full release of the .NET Framework, unlike version 3.5, which was merely a set of library updates on top of the .NET Framework version 2.0. Because of this full framework revision, there has been a welcome bit of consolidation of assemblies and configuration settings. The full runtime version change to 4.0 also means that you have to explicitly pick version 4.0 of the runtime when you create a new Application Pool in IIS, unlike .NET 3.5, which actually requires version 2.0 of the runtime. In this first of two parts I'll take a look at some of the changes in the core ASP.NET runtime. In the next edition I'll go over improvements in Web Forms and Visual Studio. Core Engine Features Most of the high profile improvements in ASP.NET have to do with Web Forms, but there are a few gems in the core runtime that should make life easier for ASP.NET developers. The following list describes some of the things I've found useful among the new features. Clean web.config Files Are Back! If you've been using ASP.NET 3.5, you probably have noticed that the web.config file has turned into quite a mess of configuration settings between all the custom handler and module mappings for the various web server versions. Part of the reason for this mess is that .NET 3.5 is a collection of add-on components running on top of the .NET Runtime 2.0 and so almost all of the new features of .NET 3.5 where essentially introduced as custom modules and handlers that had to be explicitly configured in the config file. Because the core runtime didn't rev with 3.5, all those configuration options couldn't be moved up to other configuration files in the system chain. With version 4.0 a consolidation was possible, and the result is a much simpler web.config file by default. A default empty ASP.NET 4.0 Web Forms project looks like this: <?xml version="1.0"?> <configuration> <system.web> <compilation debug="true" targetFramework="4.0" /> </system.web> </configuration> Need I say more? Configuration Transformation Files to Manage Configurations and Application Packaging ASP.NET 4.0 introduces the ability to create multi-target configuration files. This means it's possible to create a single configuration file that can be transformed based on relatively simple replacement rules using a Visual Studio and WebDeploy provided XSLT syntax. The idea is that you can create a 'master' configuration file and then create customized versions of this master configuration file by applying some relatively simplistic search and replace, add or remove logic to specific elements and attributes in the original file. To give you an idea, here's the example code that Visual Studio creates for a default web.Release.config file, which replaces a connection string, removes the debug attribute and replaces the CustomErrors section: <?xml version="1.0"?> <configuration xmlns:xdt="http://schemas.microsoft.com/XML-Document-Transform"> <connectionStrings> <add name="MyDB" connectionString="Data Source=ReleaseSQLServer;Initial Catalog=MyReleaseDB;Integrated Security=True" xdt:Transform="SetAttributes" xdt:Locator="Match(name)"/> </connectionStrings> <system.web> <compilation xdt:Transform="RemoveAttributes(debug)" /> <customErrors defaultRedirect="GenericError.htm" mode="RemoteOnly" xdt:Transform="Replace"> <error statusCode="500" redirect="InternalError.htm"/> </customErrors> </system.web> </configuration> You can see the XSL transform syntax that drives this functionality. Basically, only the elements listed in the override file are matched and updated – all the rest of the original web.config file stays intact. Visual Studio 2010 supports this functionality directly in the project system so it's easy to create and maintain these customized configurations in the project tree. Once you're ready to publish your application, you can then use the Publish <yourWebApplication> option on the Build menu which allows publishing to disk, via FTP or to a Web Server using Web Deploy. You can also create a deployment package as a .zip file which can be used by the WebDeploy tool to configure and install the application. You can manually run the Web Deploy tool or use the IIS Manager to install the package on the server or other machine. You can find out more about WebDeploy and Packaging here: http://tinyurl.com/2anxcje. Improved Routing Routing provides a relatively simple way to create clean URLs with ASP.NET by associating a template URL path and routing it to a specific ASP.NET HttpHandler. Microsoft first introduced routing with ASP.NET MVC and then they integrated routing with a basic implementation in the core ASP.NET engine via a separate ASP.NET routing assembly. In ASP.NET 4.0, the process of using routing functionality gets a bit easier. First, routing is now rolled directly into System.Web, so no extra assembly reference is required in your projects to use routing. The RouteCollection class now includes a MapPageRoute() method that makes it easy to route to any ASP.NET Page requests without first having to implement an IRouteHandler implementation. It would have been nice if this could have been extended to serve *any* handler implementation, but unfortunately for anything but a Page derived handlers you still will have to implement a custom IRouteHandler implementation. ASP.NET Pages now include a RouteData collection that will contain route information. Retrieving route data is now a lot easier by simply using this.RouteData.Values["routeKey"] where the routeKey is the value specified in the route template (i.e., "users/{userId}" would use Values["userId"]). The Page class also has a GetRouteUrl() method that you can use to create URLs with route data values rather than hardcoding the URL: <%= this.GetRouteUrl("users",new { userId="ricks" }) %> You can also use the new Expression syntax using <%$RouteUrl %> to accomplish something similar, which can be easier to embed into Page or MVC View code: <a runat="server" href='<%$RouteUrl:RouteName=user, id=ricks %>'>Visit User</a> Finally, the Response object also includes a new RedirectToRoute() method to build a route url for redirection without hardcoding the URL. Response.RedirectToRoute("users", new { userId = "ricks" }); All of these routines are helpers that have been integrated into the core ASP.NET engine to make it easier to create routes and retrieve route data, which hopefully will result in more people taking advantage of routing in ASP.NET. To find out more about the routing improvements you can check out Dan Maharry's blog which has a couple of nice blog entries on this subject: http://tinyurl.com/37trutj and http://tinyurl.com/39tt5w5. Session State Improvements Session state is an often used and abused feature in ASP.NET and version 4.0 introduces a few enhancements geared towards making session state more efficient and to minimize at least some of the ill effects of overuse. The first improvement affects out of process session state, which is typically used in web farm environments or for sites that store application sensitive data that must survive AppDomain restarts (which in my opinion is just about any application). When using OutOfProc session state, ASP.NET serializes all the data in the session statebag into a blob that gets carried over the network and stored either in the State server or SQL Server via the Session provider. Version 4.0 provides some improvement in this serialization of the session data by offering an enableCompression option on the web.Config <Session> section, which forces the serialized session state to be compressed. Depending on the type of data that is being serialized, this compression can reduce the size of the data travelling over the wire by as much as a third. It works best on string data, but can also reduce the size of binary data. In addition, ASP.NET 4.0 now offers a way to programmatically turn session state on or off as part of the request processing queue. In prior versions, the only way to specify whether session state is available is by implementing a marker interface on the HTTP handler implementation. In ASP.NET 4.0, you can now turn session state on and off programmatically via HttpContext.Current.SetSessionStateBehavior() as part of the ASP.NET module pipeline processing as long as it occurs before the AquireRequestState pipeline event. Output Cache Provider Output caching in ASP.NET has been a very useful but potentially memory intensive feature. The default OutputCache mechanism works through in-memory storage that persists generated output based on various lifetime related parameters. While this works well enough for many intended scenarios, it also can quickly cause runaway memory consumption as the cache fills up and serves many variations of pages on your site. ASP.NET 4.0 introduces a provider model for the OutputCache module so it becomes possible to plug-in custom storage strategies for cached pages. One of the goals also appears to be to consolidate some of the different cache storage mechanisms used in .NET in general to a generic Windows AppFabric framework in the future, so various different mechanisms like OutputCache, the non-Page specific ASP.NET cache and possibly even session state eventually can use the same caching engine for storage of persisted data both in memory and out of process scenarios. For developers, the OutputCache provider feature means that you can now extend caching on your own by implementing a custom Cache provider based on the System.Web.Caching.OutputCacheProvider class. You can find more info on creating an Output Cache provider in Gunnar Peipman's blog at: http://tinyurl.com/2vt6g7l. Response.RedirectPermanent ASP.NET 4.0 includes features to issue a permanent redirect that issues as an HTTP 301 Moved Permanently response rather than the standard 302 Redirect respond. In pre-4.0 versions you had to manually create your permanent redirect by setting the Status and Status code properties – Response.RedirectPermanent() makes this operation more obvious and discoverable. There's also a Response.RedirectToRoutePermanent() which provides permanent redirection of route Urls. Preloading of Applications ASP.NET 4.0 provides a new feature to preload ASP.NET applications on startup, which is meant to provide a more consistent startup experience. If your application has a lengthy startup cycle it can appear very slow to serve data to clients while the application is warming up and loading initial resources. So rather than serve these startup requests slowly in ASP.NET 4.0, you can force the application to initialize itself first before even accepting requests for processing. This feature works only on IIS 7.5 (Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2) and works in combination with IIS. You can set up a worker process in IIS 7.5 to always be running, which starts the Application Pool worker process immediately. ASP.NET 4.0 then allows you to specify site-specific settings by setting the serverAutoStartEnabled on a particular site along with an optional serviceAutoStartProvider class that can be used to receive "startup events" when the application starts up. This event in turn can be used to configure the application and optionally pre-load cache data and other information required by the app on startup.  The configuration settings need to be made in applicationhost.config: <sites> <site name="WebApplication2" id="1"> <application path="/" serviceAutoStartEnabled="true" serviceAutoStartProvider="PreWarmup" /> </site> </sites> <serviceAutoStartProviders> <add name="PreWarmup" type="PreWarmupProvider,MyAssembly" /> </serviceAutoStartProviders> Hooking up a warm up provider is optional so you can omit the provider definition and reference. If you do define it here's what it looks like: public class PreWarmupProvider System.Web.Hosting.IProcessHostPreloadClient { public void Preload(string[] parameters) { // initialization for app } } This code fires and while it's running, ASP.NET/IIS will hold requests from hitting the pipeline. So until this code completes the application will not start taking requests. The idea is that you can perform any pre-loading of resources and cache values so that the first request will be ready to perform at optimal performance level without lag. Runtime Performance Improvements According to Microsoft, there have also been a number of invisible performance improvements in the internals of the ASP.NET runtime that should make ASP.NET 4.0 applications run more efficiently and use less resources. These features come without any change requirements in applications and are virtually transparent, except that you get the benefits by updating to ASP.NET 4.0. Summary The core feature set changes are minimal which continues a tradition of small incremental changes to the ASP.NET runtime. ASP.NET has been proven as a solid platform and I'm actually rather happy to see that most of the effort in this release went into stability, performance and usability improvements rather than a massive amount of new features. The new functionality added in 4.0 is minimal but very useful. A lot of people are still running pure .NET 2.0 applications these days and have stayed off of .NET 3.5 for some time now. I think that version 4.0 with its full .NET runtime rev and assembly and configuration consolidation will make an attractive platform for developers to update to. If you're a Web Forms developer in particular, ASP.NET 4.0 includes a host of new features in the Web Forms engine that are significant enough to warrant a quick move to .NET 4.0. I'll cover those changes in my next column. Until then, I suggest you give ASP.NET 4.0 a spin and see for yourself how the new features can help you out. © Rick Strahl, West Wind Technologies, 2005-2010Posted in ASP.NET  

    Read the article

  • An easy way to create Side by Side registrationless COM Manifests with Visual Studio

    - by Rick Strahl
    Here's something I didn't find out until today: You can use Visual Studio to easily create registrationless COM manifest files for you with just a couple of small steps. Registrationless COM lets you use COM component without them being registered in the registry. This means it's possible to deploy COM components along with another application using plain xcopy semantics. To be sure it's rarely quite that easy - you need to watch out for dependencies - but if you know you have COM components that are light weight and have no or known dependencies it's easy to get everything into a single folder and off you go. Registrationless COM works via manifest files which carry the same name as the executable plus a .manifest extension (ie. yourapp.exe.manifest) I'm going to use a Visual FoxPro COM object as an example and create a simple Windows Forms app that calls the component - without that component being registered. Let's take a walk down memory lane… Create a COM Component I start by creating a FoxPro COM component because that's what I know and am working with here in my legacy environment. You can use VB classic or C++ ATL object if that's more to your liking. Here's a real simple Fox one: DEFINE CLASS SimpleServer as Session OLEPUBLIC FUNCTION HelloWorld(lcName) RETURN "Hello " + lcName ENDDEFINE Compile it into a DLL COM component with: BUILD MTDLL simpleserver FROM simpleserver RECOMPILE And to make sure it works test it quickly from Visual FoxPro: server = CREATEOBJECT("simpleServer.simpleserver") MESSAGEBOX( server.HelloWorld("Rick") ) Using Visual Studio to create a Manifest File for a COM Component Next open Visual Studio and create a new executable project - a Console App or WinForms or WPF application will all do. Go to the References Node Select Add Reference Use the Browse tab and find your compiled DLL to import  Next you'll see your assembly in the project. Right click on the reference and select Properties Click on the Isolated DropDown and select True Compile and that's all there's to it. Visual Studio will create a App.exe.manifest file right alongside your application's EXE. The manifest file created looks like this: xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"? assembly xsi:schemaLocation="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:asm.v1 assembly.adaptive.xsd" manifestVersion="1.0" xmlns:asmv1="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:asm.v1" xmlns:asmv2="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:asm.v2" xmlns:asmv3="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:asm.v3" xmlns:dsig="http://www.w3.org/2000/09/xmldsig#" xmlns:co.v1="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:clickonce.v1" xmlns:co.v2="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:clickonce.v2" xmlns="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:asm.v1" xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" assemblyIdentity name="App.exe" version="1.0.0.0" processorArchitecture="x86" type="win32" / file name="simpleserver.DLL" asmv2:size="27293" hash xmlns="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:asm.v2" dsig:Transforms dsig:Transform Algorithm="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:HashTransforms.Identity" / dsig:Transforms dsig:DigestMethod Algorithm="http://www.w3.org/2000/09/xmldsig#sha1" / dsig:DigestValuepuq+ua20bbidGOWhPOxfquztBCU=dsig:DigestValue hash typelib tlbid="{f10346e2-c9d9-47f7-81d1-74059cc15c3c}" version="1.0" helpdir="" resourceid="0" flags="HASDISKIMAGE" / comClass clsid="{af2c2811-0657-4264-a1f5-06d033a969ff}" threadingModel="Apartment" tlbid="{f10346e2-c9d9-47f7-81d1-74059cc15c3c}" progid="simpleserver.SimpleServer" description="simpleserver.SimpleServer" / file assembly Now let's finish our super complex console app to test with: using System; using System.Collections.Generic; using System.Text; namespace ConsoleApplication1 {     class Program     {         static voidMain(string[] args)         { Type type = Type.GetTypeFromProgID("simpleserver.simpleserver",true); dynamic server = Activator.CreateInstance(type); Console.WriteLine(server.HelloWorld("rick")); Console.ReadLine(); } } } Now run the Console Application… As expected that should work. And why not? The COM component is still registered, right? :-) Nothing tricky about that. Let's unregister the COM component and then re-run and see what happens. Go to the Command Prompt Change to the folder where the DLL is installed Unregister with: RegSvr32 -u simpleserver.dll      To be sure that the COM component no longer works, check it out with the same test you used earlier (ie. o = CREATEOBJECT("SimpleServer.SimpleServer") in your development environment or VBScript etc.). Make sure you run the EXE and you don't re-compile the application or else Visual Studio will complain that it can't find the COM component in the registry while compiling. In fact now that we have our .manifest file you can remove the COM object from the project. When you run run the EXE from Windows Explorer or a command prompt to avoid the recompile. Watch out for embedded Manifest Files Now recompile your .NET project and run it… and it will most likely fail! The problem is that .NET applications by default embeds a manifest file into the compiled EXE application which results in the externally created manifest file being completely ignored. Only one manifest can be applied at a time and the compiled manifest takes precedency. Uh, thanks Visual Studio - not very helpful… Note that if you use another development tool like Visual FoxPro to create your EXE this won't be an issue as long as the tool doesn't automatically add a manifest file. Creating a Visual FoxPro EXE for example will work immediately with the generated manifest file as is. If you are using .NET and Visual Studio you have a couple of options of getting around this: Remove the embedded manifest file Copy the contents of the generated manifest file into a project manifest file and compile that in To remove an embedded manifest in a Visual Studio project: Open the Project Properties (Alt-Enter on project node) Go down to Resources | Manifest and select | Create Application without a Manifest   You can now add use the external manifest file and it will actually be respected when the app runs. The other option is to let Visual Studio create the manifest file on disk and then explicitly add the manifest file into the project. Notice on the dialog above I did this for app.exe.manifest and the manifest actually shows up in the list. If I select this file it will be compiled into the EXE and be used in lieu of any external files and that works as well. Remove the simpleserver.dll reference so you can compile your code and run the application. Now it should work without COM registration of the component. Personally I prefer external manifests because they can be modified after the fact - compiled manifests are evil in my mind because they are immutable - once they are there they can't be overriden or changed. So I prefer an external manifest. However, if you are absolutely sure nothing needs to change and you don't want anybody messing with your manifest, you can also embed it. The option to either is there. Watch for Manifest Caching While working trying to get this to work I ran into some problems at first. Specifically when it wasn't working at first (due to the embedded schema) I played with various different manifest layouts in different files etc.. There are a number of different ways to actually represent manifest files including offloading to separate folder (more on that later). A few times I made deliberate errors in the schema file and I found that regardless of what I did once the app failed or worked no amount of changing of the manifest file would make it behave differently. It appears that Windows is caching the manifest data for a given EXE or DLL. It takes a restart or a recompile of either the EXE or the DLL to clear the caching. Recompile your servers in order to see manifest changes unless there's an outright failure of an invalid manifest file. If the app starts the manifest is being read and caches immediately. This can be very confusing especially if you don't know that it's happening. I found myself always recompiling the exe after each run and before making any changes to the manifest file. Don't forget about Runtimes of COM Objects In the example I used above I used a Visual FoxPro COM component. Visual FoxPro is a runtime based environment so if I'm going to distribute an application that uses a FoxPro COM object the runtimes need to be distributed as well. The same is true of classic Visual Basic applications. Assuming that you don't know whether the runtimes are installed on the target machines make sure to install all the additional files in the EXE's directory alongside the COM DLL. In the case of Visual FoxPro the target folder should contain: The EXE  App.exe The Manifest file (unless it's compiled in) App.exe.manifest The COM object DLL (simpleserver.dll) Visual FoxPro Runtimes: VFP9t.dll (or VFP9r.dll for non-multithreaded dlls), vfp9rENU.dll, msvcr71.dll All these files should be in the same folder. Debugging Manifest load Errors If you for some reason get your manifest loading wrong there are a couple of useful tools available - SxSTrace and SxSParse. These two tools can be a huge help in debugging manifest loading errors. Put the following into a batch file (SxS_Trace.bat for example): sxstrace Trace -logfile:sxs.bin sxstrace Parse -logfile:sxs.bin -outfile:sxs.txt Then start the batch file before running your EXE. Make sure there's no caching happening as described in the previous section. For example, if I go into the manifest file and explicitly break the CLSID and/or ProgID I get a detailed report on where the EXE is looking for the manifest and what it's reading. Eventually the trace gives me an error like this: INFO: Parsing Manifest File C:\wwapps\Conf\SideBySide\Code\app.EXE.     INFO: Manifest Definition Identity is App.exe,processorArchitecture="x86",type="win32",version="1.0.0.0".     ERROR: Line 13: The value {AAaf2c2811-0657-4264-a1f5-06d033a969ff} of attribute clsid in element comClass is invalid. ERROR: Activation Context generation failed. End Activation Context Generation. pinpointing nicely where the error lies. Pay special attention to the various attributes - they have to match exactly in the different sections of the manifest file(s). Multiple COM Objects The manifest file that Visual Studio creates is actually quite more complex than is required for basic registrationless COM object invokation. The manifest file can be simplified a lot actually by stripping off various namespaces and removing the type library references altogether. Here's an example of a simplified manifest file that actually includes references to 2 COM servers: xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"? assembly xmlns="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:asm.v1" manifestVersion="1.0" assemblyIdentity name="App.exe" version="1.0.0.0" processorArchitecture="x86" type="win32" / file name="simpleserver.DLL" comClass clsid="{af2c2811-0657-4264-a1f5-06d033a969ff}" threadingModel="Apartment" progid="simpleserver.SimpleServer" description="simpleserver.SimpleServer" / file file name = "sidebysidedeploy.dll" comClass clsid="{EF82B819-7963-4C36-9443-3978CD94F57C}" progid="sidebysidedeploy.SidebysidedeployServer" description="SidebySideDeploy Server" threadingModel="apartment" / file assembly Simple enough right? Routing to separate Manifest Files and Folders In the examples above all files ended up in the application's root folder - all the DLLs, support files and runtimes. Sometimes that's not so desirable and you can actually create separate manifest files. The easiest way to do this is to create a manifest file that 'routes' to another manifest file in a separate folder. Basically you create a new 'assembly identity' via a named id. You can then create a folder and another manifest with the id plus .manifest that points at the actual file. In this example I create: App.exe.manifest A folder called App.deploy A manifest file in App.deploy All DLLs and runtimes in App.deploy Let's start with that master manifest file. This file only holds a reference to another manifest file: App.exe.manifest xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" standalone="yes"? assembly xmlns="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:asm.v1" manifestVersion="1.0" assemblyIdentity name="App.exe" version="1.0.0.0" processorArchitecture="x86" type="win32" / dependency dependentAssembly assemblyIdentity name="App.deploy" version="1.0.0.0" type="win32" / dependentAssembly dependency assembly   Note this file only contains a dependency to App.deploy which is another manifest id. I can then create App.deploy.manifest in the current folder or in an App.deploy folder. In this case I'll create App.deploy and in it copy the DLLs and support runtimes. I then create App.deploy.manifest. App.deploy.manifest xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" standalone="yes"? assembly xmlns="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:asm.v1" manifestVersion="1.0" assemblyIdentity name="App.deploy" type="win32" version="1.0.0.0" / file name="simpleserver.DLL" comClass clsid="{af2c2811-0657-4264-a1f5-06d033a969ff}" threadingModel="Apartment" progid="simpleserver.SimpleServer" description="simpleserver.SimpleServer" / file file name="sidebysidedeploy.dll" comClass clsid="{EF82B819-7963-4C36-9443-3978CD94F57C}" threadingModel="Apartment" progid="sidebysidedeploy.SidebysidedeployServer" description="SidebySideDeploy Server" / file assembly   In this manifest file I then host my COM DLLs and any support runtimes. This is quite useful if you have lots of DLLs you are referencing or if you need to have separate configuration and application files that are associated with the COM object. This way the operation of your main application and the COM objects it interacts with is somewhat separated. You can see the two folders here:   Routing Manifests to different Folders In theory registrationless COM should be pretty easy in painless - you've seen the configuration manifest files and it certainly doesn't look very complicated, right? But the devil's in the details. The ActivationContext API (SxS - side by side activation) is very intolerant of small errors in the XML or formatting of the keys, so be really careful when setting up components, especially if you are manually editing these files. If you do run into trouble SxsTrace/SxsParse are a huge help to track down the problems. And remember that if you do have problems that you'll need to recompile your EXEs or DLLs for the SxS APIs to refresh themselves properly. All of this gets even more fun if you want to do registrationless COM inside of IIS :-) But I'll leave that for another blog post…© Rick Strahl, West Wind Technologies, 2005-2011Posted in COM  .NET  FoxPro   Tweet (function() { var po = document.createElement('script'); po.type = 'text/javascript'; po.async = true; po.src = 'https://apis.google.com/js/plusone.js'; var s = document.getElementsByTagName('script')[0]; s.parentNode.insertBefore(po, s); })();

    Read the article

  • Customize the SimpleMembership in ASP.NET MVC 4.0

    - by thangchung
    As we know, .NET 4.5 have come up to us, and come along with a lot of new interesting features as well. Visual Studio 2012 was also introduced some days ago. They made us feel very happy with cool improvement along with us. Performance when loading code editor is very good at the moment (immediate after click on the solution). I explore some of cool features at these days. Some of them like Json.NET integrated in ASP.NET MVC 4.0, improvement on asynchronous action, new lightweight theme on Visual Studio, supporting very good on mobile development, improvement on authentication… I reviewed them, and found out that in this version of .NET Microsoft was not only developed new feature that suggest from community but also focused on improvement performance of existing features or components. Besides that, they also opened source more projects, like Entity Framework, Reactive Extensions, ASP.NET Web Stack… At the moment, I feel Microsoft want to open source more and more their projects. Today, I am going to dive in deep on new SimpleMembership model. It is really good because in this security model, Microsoft actually focus on development needs. As we know, in the past, they introduce some of provider supplied for coding security like MembershipProvider, RoleProvider… I don’t need to talk but everyone that have ever used it know that they were actually hard to use, and not easy to maintain and unit testing. Why? Because every time you inherit it, you need to override all methods inside it. Some people try to abstract it by introduce more method with virtual keyword, and try to implement basic behavior, so in the subclass we only need to override the method that need for their business. But to me, it’s only the way to work around. ASP.NET team and Web Matrix knew about it, so they built the new features based on existing components on .NET framework. And one of component that comes to us is SimpleMembership and SimpleRole. They implemented the Façade pattern on the top of those, and called it is WebSecurity. In the web, we can call WebSecurity anywhere we want, and make a call to inside wrapper of it. I read a lot of them on web blog, on technical news, on MSDN as well. Matthew Osborn had an excellent article about it at his blog. Jon Galloway had an article like this at here. He analyzed why old membership provider not fixed well to ASP.NET MVC and how to get over it. Those are very good to me. It introduced to me about how to doing SimpleMembership on it, how to doing it on new ASP.NET MVC web application. But one thing, those didn’t tell me was how to doing it on existing security model (that mean we already had Users and Roles on legacy system, and how we can integrate it to this system), that’s a reason I will introduce it today. I have spent couples of hours to see what’s inside this, and try to make one example to clarify my concern. And it’s lucky that I can make it working well.The first thing, we need to create new ASP.NET MVC application on Visual Studio 2012. We need to choose Internet type for this web application. ASP.NET MVC actually creates all needs components for the basic membership and basic role. The cool feature is DoNetOpenAuth come along with it that means we can log-in using facebook, twitter or Windows Live if you want. But it’s only for LocalDb, so we need to change it to fix with existing database model on SQL Server. The next step we have to make SimpleMembership can understand which database we use and show it which column need to point to for the ID and UserName. I really like this feature because SimpleMembership on need to know about the ID and UserName, and they don’t care about rest of it. I assume that we have an existing database model like So we will point it in code like The codes for it, we put on InitializeSimpleMembershipAttribute like [AttributeUsage(AttributeTargets.Class | AttributeTargets.Method, AllowMultiple = false, Inherited = true)]     public sealed class InitializeSimpleMembershipAttribute : ActionFilterAttribute     {         private static SimpleMembershipInitializer _initializer;         private static object _initializerLock = new object();         private static bool _isInitialized;         public override void OnActionExecuting(ActionExecutingContext filterContext)         {             // Ensure ASP.NET Simple Membership is initialized only once per app start             LazyInitializer.EnsureInitialized(ref _initializer, ref _isInitialized, ref _initializerLock);         }         private class SimpleMembershipInitializer         {             public SimpleMembershipInitializer()             {                 try                 {                     WebSecurity.InitializeDatabaseConnection("DefaultDb", "User", "Id", "UserName", autoCreateTables: true);                 }                 catch (Exception ex)                 {                     throw new InvalidOperationException("The ASP.NET Simple Membership database could not be initialized. For more information, please see http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=256588", ex);                 }             }         }     }And decorating it in the AccountController as below [Authorize]     [InitializeSimpleMembership]     public class AccountController : ControllerIn this case, assuming that we need to override the ValidateUser to point this to existing User database table, and validate it. We have to add one more class like public class CustomAdminMembershipProvider : SimpleMembershipProvider     {         // TODO: will do a better way         private const string SELECT_ALL_USER_SCRIPT = "select * from [dbo].[User]private where UserName = '{0}'";         private readonly IEncrypting _encryptor;         private readonly SimpleSecurityContext _simpleSecurityContext;         public CustomAdminMembershipProvider(SimpleSecurityContext simpleSecurityContext)             : this(new Encryptor(), new SimpleSecurityContext("DefaultDb"))         {         }         public CustomAdminMembershipProvider(IEncrypting encryptor, SimpleSecurityContext simpleSecurityContext)         {             _encryptor = encryptor;             _simpleSecurityContext = simpleSecurityContext;         }         public override bool ValidateUser(string username, string password)         {             if (string.IsNullOrEmpty(username))             {                 throw new ArgumentException("Argument cannot be null or empty", "username");             }             if (string.IsNullOrEmpty(password))             {                 throw new ArgumentException("Argument cannot be null or empty", "password");             }             var hash = _encryptor.Encode(password);             using (_simpleSecurityContext)             {                 var users =                     _simpleSecurityContext.Users.SqlQuery(                         string.Format(SELECT_ALL_USER_SCRIPT, username));                 if (users == null && !users.Any())                 {                     return false;                 }                 return users.FirstOrDefault().Password == hash;             }         }     }SimpleSecurityDataContext at here public class SimpleSecurityContext : DbContext     {         public DbSet<User> Users { get; set; }         public SimpleSecurityContext(string connStringName) :             base(connStringName)         {             this.Configuration.LazyLoadingEnabled = true;             this.Configuration.ProxyCreationEnabled = false;         }         protected override void OnModelCreating(DbModelBuilder modelBuilder)         {             base.OnModelCreating(modelBuilder);                          modelBuilder.Configurations.Add(new UserMapping());         }     }And Mapping for User as below public class UserMapping : EntityMappingBase<User>     {         public UserMapping()         {             this.Property(x => x.UserName);             this.Property(x => x.DisplayName);             this.Property(x => x.Password);             this.Property(x => x.Email);             this.ToTable("User");         }     }One important thing, you need to modify the web.config to point to our customize SimpleMembership <membership defaultProvider="AdminMemberProvider" userIsOnlineTimeWindow="15">       <providers>         <clear/>         <add name="AdminMemberProvider" type="CIK.News.Web.Infras.Security.CustomAdminMembershipProvider, CIK.News.Web.Infras" />       </providers>     </membership>     <roleManager enabled="false">       <providers>         <clear />         <add name="AdminRoleProvider" type="CIK.News.Web.Infras.Security.AdminRoleProvider, CIK.News.Web.Infras" />       </providers>     </roleManager>The good thing at here is we don’t need to modify the code on AccountController. We only need to modify on SimpleMembership and Simple Role (if need). Now build all solutions, run it. We should see a screen like thisIf I login to Twitter button at the bottom of this page, we will be transfer to twitter authentication pageYou have to waiting for a moment Afterwards it will transfer you back to your admin screenYou can find all source codes at my MSDN code. I will really happy if you guys feel free to put some comments as below. It will be helpful to improvement my code in the future. Thank for all your readings. 

    Read the article

  • The Execute SQL Task

    In this article we are going to take you through the Execute SQL Task in SQL Server Integration Services for SQL Server 2005 (although it appies just as well to SQL Server 2008).  We will be covering all the essentials that you will need to know to effectively use this task and make it as flexible as possible. The things we will be looking at are as follows: A tour of the Task. The properties of the Task. After looking at these introductory topics we will then get into some examples. The examples will show different types of usage for the task: Returning a single value from a SQL query with two input parameters. Returning a rowset from a SQL query. Executing a stored procedure and retrieveing a rowset, a return value, an output parameter value and passing in an input parameter. Passing in the SQL Statement from a variable. Passing in the SQL Statement from a file. Tour Of The Task Before we can start to use the Execute SQL Task in our packages we are going to need to locate it in the toolbox. Let's do that now. Whilst in the Control Flow section of the package expand your toolbox and locate the Execute SQL Task. Below is how we found ours. Now drag the task onto the designer. As you can see from the following image we have a validation error appear telling us that no connection manager has been assigned to the task. This can be easily remedied by creating a connection manager. There are certain types of connection manager that are compatable with this task so we cannot just create any connection manager and these are detailed in a few graphics time. Double click on the task itself to take a look at the custom user interface provided to us for this task. The task will open on the general tab as shown below. Take a bit of time to have a look around here as throughout this article we will be revisting this page many times. Whilst on the general tab, drop down the combobox next to the ConnectionType property. In here you will see the types of connection manager which this task will accept. As with SQL Server 2000 DTS, SSIS allows you to output values from this task in a number of formats. Have a look at the combobox next to the Resultset property. The major difference here is the ability to output into XML. If you drop down the combobox next to the SQLSourceType property you will see the ways in which you can pass a SQL Statement into the task itself. We will have examples of each of these later on but certainly when we saw these for the first time we were very excited. Next to the SQLStatement property if you click in the empty box next to it you will see ellipses appear. Click on them and you will see the very basic query editor that becomes available to you. Alternatively after you have specified a connection manager for the task you can click on the Build Query button to bring up a completely different query editor. This is slightly inconsistent. Once you've finished looking around the general tab, move on to the next tab which is the parameter mapping tab. We shall, again, be visiting this tab throughout the article but to give you an initial heads up this is where you define the input, output and return values from your task. Note this is not where you specify the resultset. If however you now move on to the ResultSet tab this is where you define what variable will receive the output from your SQL Statement in whatever form that is. Property Expressions are one of the most amazing things to happen in SSIS and they will not be covered here as they deserve a whole article to themselves. Watch out for this as their usefulness will astound you. For a more detailed discussion of what should be the parameter markers in the SQL Statements on the General tab and how to map them to variables on the Parameter Mapping tab see Working with Parameters and Return Codes in the Execute SQL Task. Task Properties There are two places where you can specify the properties for your task. One is in the task UI itself and the other is in the property pane which will appear if you right click on your task and select Properties from the context menu. We will be doing plenty of property setting in the UI later so let's take a moment to have a look at the property pane. Below is a graphic showing our properties pane. Now we shall take you through all the properties and tell you exactly what they mean. A lot of these properties you will see across all tasks as well as the package because of everything's base structure The Container. BypassPrepare Should the statement be prepared before sending to the connection manager destination (True/False) Connection This is simply the name of the connection manager that the task will use. We can get this from the connection manager tray at the bottom of the package. DelayValidation Really interesting property and it tells the task to not validate until it actually executes. A usage for this may be that you are operating on table yet to be created but at runtime you know the table will be there. Description Very simply the description of your Task. Disable Should the task be enabled or not? You can also set this through a context menu by right clicking on the task itself. DisableEventHandlers As a result of events that happen in the task, should the event handlers for the container fire? ExecValueVariable The variable assigned here will get or set the execution value of the task. Expressions Expressions as we mentioned earlier are a really powerful tool in SSIS and this graphic below shows us a small peek of what you can do. We select a property on the left and assign an expression to the value of that property on the right causing the value to be dynamically changed at runtime. One of the most obvious uses of this is that the property value can be built dynamically from within the package allowing you a great deal of flexibility FailPackageOnFailure If this task fails does the package? FailParentOnFailure If this task fails does the parent container? A task can he hosted inside another container i.e. the For Each Loop Container and this would then be the parent. ForcedExecutionValue This property allows you to hard code an execution value for the task. ForcedExecutionValueType What is the datatype of the ForcedExecutionValue? ForceExecutionResult Force the task to return a certain execution result. This could then be used by the workflow constraints. Possible values are None, Success, Failure and Completion. ForceExecutionValue Should we force the execution result? IsolationLevel This is the transaction isolation level of the task. IsStoredProcedure Certain optimisations are made by the task if it knows that the query is a Stored Procedure invocation. The docs say this will always be false unless the connection is an ADO connection. LocaleID Gets or sets the LocaleID of the container. LoggingMode Should we log for this container and what settings should we use? The value choices are UseParentSetting, Enabled and Disabled. MaximumErrorCount How many times can the task fail before we call it a day? Name Very simply the name of the task. ResultSetType How do you want the results of your query returned? The choices are ResultSetType_None, ResultSetType_SingleRow, ResultSetType_Rowset and ResultSetType_XML. SqlStatementSource Your Query/SQL Statement. SqlStatementSourceType The method of specifying the query. Your choices here are DirectInput, FileConnection and Variables TimeOut How long should the task wait to receive results? TransactionOption How should the task handle being asked to join a transaction? Usage Examples As we move through the examples we will only cover in them what we think you must know and what we think you should see. This means that some of the more elementary steps like setting up variables will be covered in the early examples but skipped and simply referred to in later ones. All these examples used the AventureWorks database that comes with SQL Server 2005. Returning a Single Value, Passing in Two Input Parameters So the first thing we are going to do is add some variables to our package. The graphic below shows us those variables having been defined. Here the CountOfEmployees variable will be used as the output from the query and EndDate and StartDate will be used as input parameters. As you can see all these variables have been scoped to the package. Scoping allows us to have domains for variables. Each container has a scope and remember a package is a container as well. Variable values of the parent container can be seen in child containers but cannot be passed back up to the parent from a child. Our following graphic has had a number of changes made. The first of those changes is that we have created and assigned an OLEDB connection manager to this Task ExecuteSQL Task Connection. The next thing is we have made sure that the SQLSourceType property is set to Direct Input as we will be writing in our statement ourselves. We have also specified that only a single row will be returned from this query. The expressions we typed in was: SELECT COUNT(*) AS CountOfEmployees FROM HumanResources.Employee WHERE (HireDate BETWEEN ? AND ?) Moving on now to the Parameter Mapping tab this is where we are going to tell the task about our input paramaters. We Add them to the window specifying their direction and datatype. A quick word here about the structure of the variable name. As you can see SSIS has preceeded the variable with the word user. This is a default namespace for variables but you can create your own. When defining your variables if you look at the variables window title bar you will see some icons. If you hover over the last one on the right you will see it says "Choose Variable Columns". If you click the button you will see a list of checkbox options and one of them is namespace. after checking this you will see now where you can define your own namespace. The next tab, result set, is where we need to get back the value(s) returned from our statement and assign to a variable which in our case is CountOfEmployees so we can use it later perhaps. Because we are only returning a single value then if you remember from earlier we are allowed to assign a name to the resultset but it must be the name of the column (or alias) from the query. A really cool feature of Business Intelligence Studio being hosted by Visual Studio is that we get breakpoint support for free. In our package we set a Breakpoint so we can break the package and have a look in a watch window at the variable values as they appear to our task and what the variable value of our resultset is after the task has done the assignment. Here's that window now. As you can see the count of employess that matched the data range was 2. Returning a Rowset In this example we are going to return a resultset back to a variable after the task has executed not just a single row single value. There are no input parameters required so the variables window is nice and straight forward. One variable of type object. Here is the statement that will form the soure for our Resultset. select p.ProductNumber, p.name, pc.Name as ProductCategoryNameFROM Production.ProductCategory pcJOIN Production.ProductSubCategory pscON pc.ProductCategoryID = psc.ProductCategoryIDJOIN Production.Product pON psc.ProductSubCategoryID = p.ProductSubCategoryID We need to make sure that we have selected Full result set as the ResultSet as shown below on the task's General tab. Because there are no input parameters we can skip the parameter mapping tab and move straight to the Result Set tab. Here we need to Add our variable defined earlier and map it to the result name of 0 (remember we covered this earlier) Once we run the task we can again set a breakpoint and have a look at the values coming back from the task. In the following graphic you can see the result set returned to us as a COM object. We can do some pretty interesting things with this COM object and in later articles that is exactly what we shall be doing. Return Values, Input/Output Parameters and Returning a Rowset from a Stored Procedure This example is pretty much going to give us a taste of everything. We have already covered in the previous example how to specify the ResultSet to be a Full result set so we will not cover it again here. For this example we are going to need 4 variables. One for the return value, one for the input parameter, one for the output parameter and one for the result set. Here is the statement we want to execute. Note how much cleaner it is than if you wanted to do it using the current version of DTS. In the Parameter Mapping tab we are going to Add our variables and specify their direction and datatypes. In the Result Set tab we can now map our final variable to the rowset returned from the stored procedure. It really is as simple as that and we were amazed at how much easier it is than in DTS 2000. Passing in the SQL Statement from a Variable SSIS as we have mentioned is hugely more flexible than its predecessor and one of the things you will notice when moving around the tasks and the adapters is that a lot of them accept a variable as an input for something they need. The ExecuteSQL task is no different. It will allow us to pass in a string variable as the SQL Statement. This variable value could have been set earlier on from inside the package or it could have been populated from outside using a configuration. The ResultSet property is set to single row and we'll show you why in a second when we look at the variables. Note also the SQLSourceType property. Here's the General Tab again. Looking at the variable we have in this package you can see we have only two. One for the return value from the statement and one which is obviously for the statement itself. Again we need to map the Result name to our variable and this can be a named Result Name (The column name or alias returned by the query) and not 0. The expected result into our variable should be the amount of rows in the Person.Contact table and if we look in the watch window we see that it is.   Passing in the SQL Statement from a File The final example we are going to show is a really interesting one. We are going to pass in the SQL statement to the task by using a file connection manager. The file itself contains the statement to run. The first thing we are going to need to do is create our file connection mananger to point to our file. Click in the connections tray at the bottom of the designer, right click and choose "New File Connection" As you can see in the graphic below we have chosen to use an existing file and have passed in the name as well. Have a look around at the other "Usage Type" values available whilst you are here. Having set that up we can now see in the connection manager tray our file connection manager sitting alongside our OLE-DB connection we have been using for the rest of these examples. Now we can go back to the familiar General Tab to set up how the task will accept our file connection as the source. All the other properties in this task are set up exactly as we have been doing for other examples depending on the options chosen so we will not cover them again here.   We hope you will agree that the Execute SQL Task has changed considerably in this release from its DTS predecessor. It has a lot of options available but once you have configured it a few times you get to learn what needs to go where. We hope you have found this article useful.

    Read the article

  • Metro, Authentication, and the ASP.NET Web API

    - by Stephen.Walther
    Imagine that you want to create a Metro style app written with JavaScript and you want to communicate with a remote web service. For example, you are creating a movie app which retrieves a list of movies from a movies service. In this situation, how do you authenticate your Metro app and the Metro user so not just anyone can call the movies service? How can you identify the user making the request so you can return user specific data from the service? The Windows Live SDK supports a feature named Single Sign-On. When a user logs into a Windows 8 machine using their Live ID, you can authenticate the user’s identity automatically. Even better, when the Metro app performs a call to a remote web service, you can pass an authentication token to the remote service and prevent unauthorized access to the service. The documentation for Single Sign-On is located here: http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/live/hh826544.aspx In this blog entry, I describe the steps that you need to follow to use Single Sign-On with a (very) simple movie app. We build a Metro app which communicates with a web service created using the ASP.NET Web API. Creating the Visual Studio Solution Let’s start by creating a Visual Studio solution which contains two projects: a Windows Metro style Blank App project and an ASP.NET MVC 4 Web Application project. Name the Metro app MovieApp and the ASP.NET MVC application MovieApp.Services. When you create the ASP.NET MVC application, select the Web API template: After you create the two projects, your Visual Studio Solution Explorer window should look like this: Configuring the Live SDK You need to get your hands on the Live SDK and register your Metro app. You can download the latest version of the SDK (version 5.2) from the following address: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=29938 After you download the Live SDK, you need to visit the following website to register your Metro app: https://manage.dev.live.com/build Don’t let the title of the website — Windows Push Notifications & Live Connect – confuse you, this is the right place. Follow the instructions at the website to register your Metro app. Don’t forget to follow the instructions in Step 3 for updating the information in your Metro app’s manifest. After you register, your client secret is displayed. Record this client secret because you will need it later (we use it with the web service): You need to configure one more thing. You must enter your Redirect Domain by visiting the following website: https://manage.dev.live.com/Applications/Index Click on your application name, click Edit Settings, click the API Settings tab, and enter a value for the Redirect Domain field. You can enter any domain that you please just as long as the domain has not already been taken: For the Redirect Domain, I entered http://superexpertmovieapp.com. Create the Metro MovieApp Next, we need to create the MovieApp. The MovieApp will: 1. Use Single Sign-On to log the current user into Live 2. Call the MoviesService web service 3. Display the results in a ListView control Because we use the Live SDK in the MovieApp, we need to add a reference to it. Right-click your References folder in the Solution Explorer window and add the reference: Here’s the HTML page for the Metro App: <!DOCTYPE html> <html> <head> <meta charset="utf-8" /> <title>MovieApp</title> <!-- WinJS references --> <link href="//Microsoft.WinJS.1.0.RC/css/ui-dark.css" rel="stylesheet" /> <script src="//Microsoft.WinJS.1.0.RC/js/base.js"></script> <script src="//Microsoft.WinJS.1.0.RC/js/ui.js"></script> <!-- Live SDK --> <script type="text/javascript" src="/LiveSDKHTML/js/wl.js"></script> <!-- WebServices references --> <link href="/css/default.css" rel="stylesheet" /> <script src="/js/default.js"></script> </head> <body> <div id="tmplMovie" data-win-control="WinJS.Binding.Template"> <div class="movieItem"> <span data-win-bind="innerText:title"></span> <br /><span data-win-bind="innerText:director"></span> </div> </div> <div id="lvMovies" data-win-control="WinJS.UI.ListView" data-win-options="{ itemTemplate: select('#tmplMovie') }"> </div> </body> </html> The HTML page above contains a Template and ListView control. These controls are used to display the movies when the movies are returned from the movies service. Notice that the page includes a reference to the Live script that we registered earlier: <!-- Live SDK --> <script type="text/javascript" src="/LiveSDKHTML/js/wl.js"></script> The JavaScript code looks like this: (function () { "use strict"; var REDIRECT_DOMAIN = "http://superexpertmovieapp.com"; var WEBSERVICE_URL = "http://localhost:49743/api/movies"; function init() { WinJS.UI.processAll().done(function () { // Get element and control references var lvMovies = document.getElementById("lvMovies").winControl; // Login to Windows Live var scopes = ["wl.signin"]; WL.init({ scope: scopes, redirect_uri: REDIRECT_DOMAIN }); WL.login().then( function(response) { // Get the authentication token var authenticationToken = response.session.authentication_token; // Call the web service var options = { url: WEBSERVICE_URL, headers: { authenticationToken: authenticationToken } }; WinJS.xhr(options).done( function (xhr) { var movies = JSON.parse(xhr.response); var listMovies = new WinJS.Binding.List(movies); lvMovies.itemDataSource = listMovies.dataSource; }, function (xhr) { console.log(xhr.statusText); } ); }, function(response) { throw WinJS.ErrorFromName("Failed to login!"); } ); }); } document.addEventListener("DOMContentLoaded", init); })(); There are two constants which you need to set to get the code above to work: REDIRECT_DOMAIN and WEBSERVICE_URL. The REDIRECT_DOMAIN is the domain that you entered when registering your app with Live. The WEBSERVICE_URL is the path to your web service. You can get the correct value for WEBSERVICE_URL by opening the Project Properties for the MovieApp.Services project, clicking the Web tab, and getting the correct URL. The port number is randomly generated. In my code, I used the URL  “http://localhost:49743/api/movies”. Assuming that the user is logged into Windows 8 with a Live account, when the user runs the MovieApp, the user is logged into Live automatically. The user is logged in with the following code: // Login to Windows Live var scopes = ["wl.signin"]; WL.init({ scope: scopes, redirect_uri: REDIRECT_DOMAIN }); WL.login().then(function(response) { // Do something }); The scopes setting determines what the user has permission to do. For example, access the user’s SkyDrive or access the user’s calendar or contacts. The available scopes are listed here: http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/live/hh243646.aspx In our case, we only need the wl.signin scope which enables Single Sign-On. After the user signs in, you can retrieve the user’s Live authentication token. The authentication token is passed to the movies service to authenticate the user. Creating the Movies Service The Movies Service is implemented as an API controller in an ASP.NET MVC 4 Web API project. Here’s what the MoviesController looks like: using System.Collections.Generic; using System.Linq; using System.Net; using System.Net.Http; using System.Web.Http; using JWTSample; using MovieApp.Services.Models; namespace MovieApp.Services.Controllers { public class MoviesController : ApiController { const string CLIENT_SECRET = "NtxjF2wu7JeY1unvVN-lb0hoeWOMUFoR"; // GET api/values public HttpResponseMessage Get() { // Authenticate // Get authenticationToken var authenticationToken = Request.Headers.GetValues("authenticationToken").FirstOrDefault(); if (authenticationToken == null) { return new HttpResponseMessage(HttpStatusCode.Unauthorized); } // Validate token var d = new Dictionary<int, string>(); d.Add(0, CLIENT_SECRET); try { var myJWT = new JsonWebToken(authenticationToken, d); } catch { return new HttpResponseMessage(HttpStatusCode.Unauthorized); } // Return results return Request.CreateResponse( HttpStatusCode.OK, new List<Movie> { new Movie {Title="Star Wars", Director="Lucas"}, new Movie {Title="King Kong", Director="Jackson"}, new Movie {Title="Memento", Director="Nolan"} } ); } } } Because the Metro app performs an HTTP GET request, the MovieController Get() action is invoked. This action returns a set of three movies when, and only when, the authentication token is validated. The Movie class looks like this: using Newtonsoft.Json; namespace MovieApp.Services.Models { public class Movie { [JsonProperty(PropertyName="title")] public string Title { get; set; } [JsonProperty(PropertyName="director")] public string Director { get; set; } } } Notice that the Movie class uses the JsonProperty attribute to change Title to title and Director to director to make JavaScript developers happy. The Get() method validates the authentication token before returning the movies to the Metro app. To get authentication to work, you need to provide the client secret which you created at the Live management site. If you forgot to write down the secret, you can get it again here: https://manage.dev.live.com/Applications/Index The client secret is assigned to a constant at the top of the MoviesController class. The MoviesController class uses a helper class named JsonWebToken to validate the authentication token. This class was created by the Windows Live team. You can get the source code for the JsonWebToken class from the following GitHub repository: https://github.com/liveservices/LiveSDK/blob/master/Samples/Asp.net/AuthenticationTokenSample/JsonWebToken.cs You need to add an additional reference to your MVC project to use the JsonWebToken class: System.Runtime.Serialization. You can use the JsonWebToken class to get a unique and validated user ID like this: var user = myJWT.Claims.UserId; If you need to store user specific information then you can use the UserId property to uniquely identify the user making the web service call. Running the MovieApp When you first run the Metro MovieApp, you get a screen which asks whether the app should have permission to use Single Sign-On. This screen never appears again after you give permission once. Actually, when I first ran the app, I get the following error: According to the error, the app is blocked because “We detected some suspicious activity with your Online Id account. To help protect you, we’ve temporarily blocked your account.” This appears to be a bug in the current preview release of the Live SDK and there is more information about this bug here: http://social.msdn.microsoft.com/Forums/en-US/messengerconnect/thread/866c495f-2127-429d-ab07-842ef84f16ae/ If you click continue, and continue running the app, the error message does not appear again.  Summary The goal of this blog entry was to describe how you can validate Metro apps and Metro users when performing a call to a remote web service. First, I explained how you can create a Metro app which takes advantage of Single Sign-On to authenticate the current user against Live automatically. You learned how to register your Metro app with Live and how to include an authentication token in an Ajax call. Next, I explained how you can validate the authentication token – retrieved from the request header – in a web service. I discussed how you can use the JsonWebToken class to validate the authentication token and retrieve the unique user ID.

    Read the article

  • Building a jQuery Plug-in to make an HTML Table scrollable

    - by Rick Strahl
    Today I got a call from a customer and we were looking over an older application that uses a lot of tables to display financial and other assorted data. The application is mostly meta-data driven with lots of layout formatting automatically driven through meta data rather than through explicit hand coded HTML layouts. One of the problems in this apps are tables that display a non-fixed amount of data. The users of this app don't want to use paging to see more data, but instead want to display overflow data using a scrollbar. Many of the forms are very densely populated, often with multiple data tables that display a few rows of data in the UI at the most. This sort of layout does not lend itself well to paging, but works much better with scrollable data. Unfortunately scrollable tables are not easily created. HTML Tables are mangy beasts as anybody who's done any sort of Web development knows. Tables are finicky when it comes to styling and layout, and they have many funky quirks, especially when it comes to scrolling both of the table rows themselves or even the child columns. There's no built-in way to make tables scroll and to lock headers while you do, and while you can embed a table (or anything really) into a scrolling div with something like this: <div style="position:relative; overflow: hidden; overflow-y: scroll; height: 200px; width: 400px;"> <table id="table" style="width: 100%" class="blackborder" > <thead> <tr class="gridheader"> <th>Column 1</th> <th>Column 2</th> <th>Column 3</th> <th >Column 4</th> </tr> </thead> <tbody> <tr> <td>Column 1 Content</td> <td>Column 2 Content</td> <td>Column 3 Content</td> <td>Column 4 Content</td> </tr> <tr> <td>Column 1 Content</td> <td>Column 2 Content</td> <td>Column 3 Content</td> <td>Column 4 Content</td> </tr> … </tbody> </table> </div> </div> that won't give a very satisfying visual experience: Both the header and body scroll which looks odd. You lose context as soon as the header scrolls off the top and when you reach the bottom of the list the bottom outline of the table shows which also looks off. The the side bar shows all the way down the length of the table yet another visual miscue. In a pinch this will work, but it's ugly. What's out there? Before we go further here you should know that there are a few capable grid plug-ins out there already. Among them: Flexigrid (can work of any table as well as with AJAX data) jQuery Scrollable Table Plug-in (feature similar to what I need but not quite) jqGrid (mostly an Ajax Grid which is very powerful and works very well) But in the end none of them fit the bill of what I needed in this situation. All of these require custom CSS and some of them are fairly complex to restyle. Others are AJAX only or work better with AJAX loaded data. However, I need to actually try (as much as possible) to maintain the original styling of the tables without requiring extensive re-styling. Building the makeTableScrollable() Plug-in To make a table scrollable requires rearranging the table a bit. In the plug-in I built I create two <div> tags and split the table into two: one for the table header and one for the table body. The bottom <div> tag then contains only the table's row data and can be scrolled while the header stays fixed. Using jQuery the basic idea is pretty simple: You create the divs, copy the original table into the bottom, then clone the table, clear all content append the <thead> section, into new table and then copy that table into the second header <div>. Easy as pie, right? Unfortunately it's a bit more complicated than that as it's tricky to get the width of the table right to account for the scrollbar (by adding a small column) and making sure the borders properly line up for the two tables. A lot of style settings have to be made to ensure the table is a fixed size, to remove and reattach borders, to add extra space to allow for the scrollbar and so forth. The end result of my plug-in is a table with a scrollbar. Using the same table I used earlier the result looks like this: To create it, I use the following jQuery plug-in logic to select my table and run the makeTableScrollable() plug-in against the selector: $("#table").makeTableScrollable( { cssClass:"blackborder"} ); Without much further ado, here's the short code for the plug-in: (function ($) { $.fn.makeTableScrollable = function (options) { return this.each(function () { var $table = $(this); var opt = { // height of the table height: "250px", // right padding added to support the scrollbar rightPadding: "10px", // cssclass used for the wrapper div cssClass: "" } $.extend(opt, options); var $thead = $table.find("thead"); var $ths = $thead.find("th"); var id = $table.attr("id"); var cssClass = $table.attr("class"); if (!id) id = "_table_" + new Date().getMilliseconds().ToString(); $table.width("+=" + opt.rightPadding); $table.css("border-width", 0); // add a column to all rows of the table var first = true; $table.find("tr").each(function () { var row = $(this); if (first) { row.append($("<th>").width(opt.rightPadding)); first = false; } else row.append($("<td>").width(opt.rightPadding)); }); // force full sizing on each of the th elemnts $ths.each(function () { var $th = $(this); $th.css("width", $th.width()); }); // Create the table wrapper div var $tblDiv = $("<div>").css({ position: "relative", overflow: "hidden", overflowY: "scroll" }) .addClass(opt.cssClass); var width = $table.width(); $tblDiv.width(width).height(opt.height) .attr("id", id + "_wrapper") .css("border-top", "none"); // Insert before $tblDiv $tblDiv.insertBefore($table); // then move the table into it $table.appendTo($tblDiv); // Clone the div for header var $hdDiv = $tblDiv.clone(); $hdDiv.empty(); var width = $table.width(); $hdDiv.attr("style", "") .css("border-bottom", "none") .width(width) .attr("id", id + "_wrapper_header"); // create a copy of the table and remove all children var $newTable = $($table).clone(); $newTable.empty() .attr("id", $table.attr("id") + "_header"); $thead.appendTo($newTable); $hdDiv.insertBefore($tblDiv); $newTable.appendTo($hdDiv); $table.css("border-width", 0); }); } })(jQuery); Oh sweet spaghetti code :-) The code starts out by dealing the parameters that can be passed in the options object map: height The height of the full table/structure. The height of the outside wrapper container. Defaults to 200px. rightPadding The padding that is added to the right of the table to account for the scrollbar. Creates a column of this width and injects it into the table. If too small the rightmost column might get truncated. if too large the empty column might show. cssClass The CSS class of the wrapping container that appears to wrap the table. If you want a border around your table this class should probably provide it since the plug-in removes the table border. The rest of the code is obtuse, but pretty straight forward. It starts by creating a new column in the table to accommodate the width of the scrollbar and avoid clipping of text in the rightmost column. The width of the columns is explicitly set in the header elements to force the size of the table to be fixed and to provide the same sizing when the THEAD section is moved to a new copied table later. The table wrapper div is created, formatted and the table is moved into it. The new wrapper div is cloned for the header wrapper and configured. Finally the actual table is cloned and cleared of all elements. The original table's THEAD section is then moved into the new table. At last the new table is added to the header <div>, and the header <div> is inserted before the table wrapper <div>. I'm always amazed how easy jQuery makes it to do this sort of re-arranging, and given of what's happening the amount of code is rather small. Disclaimer: Your mileage may vary A word of warning: I make no guarantees about the code above. It's a first cut and I provided this here mainly to demonstrate the concepts of decomposing and reassembling an HTML layout :-) which jQuery makes so nice and easy. I tested this component against the typical scenarios we plan on using it for which are tables that use a few well known styles (or no styling at all). I suspect if you have complex styling on your <table> tag that things might not go so well. If you plan on using this plug-in you might want to minimize your styling of the table tag and defer any border formatting using the class passed in via the cssClass parameter, which ends up on the two wrapper div's that wrap the header and body rows. There's also no explicit support for footers. I rarely if ever use footers (when not using paging that is), so I didn't feel the need to add footer support. However, if you need that it's not difficult to add - the logic is the same as adding the header. The plug-in relies on a well-formatted table that has THEAD and TBODY sections along with TH tags in the header. Note that ASP.NET WebForm DataGrids and GridViews by default do not generate well-formatted table HTML. You can look at my Adding proper THEAD sections to a GridView post for more info on how to get a GridView to render properly. The plug-in has no dependencies other than jQuery. Even with the limitations in mind I hope this might be useful to some of you. I know I've already identified a number of places in my own existing applications where I will be plugging this in almost immediately. Resources Download Sample and Plug-in code Latest version in the West Wind Web & AJAX Toolkit Repository © Rick Strahl, West Wind Technologies, 2005-2011Posted in jQuery  HTML  ASP.NET  

    Read the article

  • CodePlex Daily Summary for Thursday, June 30, 2011

    CodePlex Daily Summary for Thursday, June 30, 2011Popular ReleasesASP.NET Comet Ajax Library (Reverse Ajax - Server Push): Reverse Ajax Samples v1.53: 16 Comprehensive ASP.NET Ajax / Reverse Ajax / WCF / MVC / Mono samplesReactive Extensions - Extensions (Rxx): Rxx 1.1: What's NewRelated Work Items Please read the latest release notes for details about what's new. About LabsAll "Labs" downloads include the Rxx.dll assembly, so only a single download is required. To start RxxLabs.exe, right-mouse click and select Run as Administrator; otherwise, do not run the Reactive WebClient lab because it will crash the program. RxxLabs.exe requires administrator privileges for the Reactive WebClient lab to register a local HTTP port. To launch the Silverlight labs...CommonLibrary.NET: CommonLibrary.NET - 0.9.7 Final: A collection of very reusable code and components in C# 4.0 ranging from ActiveRecord, Csv, Command Line Parsing, Configuration, Holiday Calendars, Logging, Authentication, and much more. Samples in <root>\src\Lib\CommonLibrary.NET\Samples CommonLibrary.NET 0.9.7Documentation 6738 6503 New 6535 Enhancements 6759 6748 6583 6737datajs - JavaScript Library for data-centric web applications: datajs version 1.0.0: datajs is a cross-browser and UI agnostic JavaScript library that enables data-centric web applications with the following features: OData client that enables CRUD operations including batching and metadata support using both ATOM and JSON payloads. Single store abstraction that provides a common API on top of HTML5 local storage technologies. Data cache component that allows reading data ranges from a collection and storing them locally to reduce the number of network requests. Changes...Coding4Fun Tools: Coding4Fun.Phone.Toolkit v1.4.4: Fix for http://coding4fun.codeplex.com/workitem/6869 was incomplete. Back button wouldn't return app bar. Corrected now. High impact bugSiteMap Editor for Microsoft Dynamics CRM 2011: SiteMap Editor (1.0.528.279): Added keyboard shortcuts: - Cut (CTRL+X) - Copy (CTRL+C) - Paste (CTRL+V) - Delete (CTRL+D) - Move up (CTRL+UP ARROW) - Move down (CTRL+DOWN ARROW) Added ability to save/load SiteMap from/to a Xml file on disk Bug fix: - Connect to a server through the status bar was throwing error "Object Reference not set to an instance of an object" - Rename TreeNode.Name after changing TreeNode.TextMicrosoft - Domain Oriented N-Layered .NET 4.0 App Sample: V2.01 ALPHA N-Layered SampleApp .NET 4.0 and EF4.1: V2.0.01 - ALPHARequired Software (Microsoft Base Software needed for Development environment) Visual Studio 2010 RTM & .NET 4.0 RTM (Final Versions) Expression Blend 4 SQL Server 2008 R2 Express/Standard/Enterprise Unity Application Block 2.0 - Published May 5th 2010 http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/details.aspx?FamilyID=2D24F179-E0A6-49D7-89C4-5B67D939F91B&displaylang=en http://unity.codeplex.com/releases/view/31277 PEX & MOLES 0.94.51023.0, 29/Oct/2010 - Visual Studio 2010 Power ...Mosaic Project: Mosaic Alpha build 261: - Fixed crash when pinning applications in x64 OS - Added Hub to video widget. It shows videos from Video library (only .wmv and .avi). Can work slow if there are too much files. - Fixed some issues with scrolling - Fixed bug with html widgets - Fixed bug in Gmail widget - Added html today widget missed in previous release - Now Mosaic saves running widgets if you restarting from optionsEnhSim: EnhSim 2.4.9 BETA: 2.4.9 BETAThis release supports WoW patch 4.2 at level 85 To use this release, you must have the Microsoft Visual C++ 2010 Redistributable Package installed. This can be downloaded from http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/details.aspx?FamilyID=A7B7A05E-6DE6-4D3A-A423-37BF0912DB84 To use the GUI you must have the .NET 4.0 Framework installed. This can be downloaded from http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/details.aspx?FamilyID=9cfb2d51-5ff4-4491-b0e5-b386f32c0992 - Added in some of th....NET Reflector Add-Ins: Reflector V7 Add-Ins: All the add-ins compiled for Reflector V7TerrariViewer: TerrariViewer v4.1 [4.0 Bug Fixes]: Version 4.1 ChangelogChanged how users will Open Player files (This change makes it much easier) This allowed me to remove the "Current player file" labels that were present Changed file control icons Added submit bug button Various Bug Fixes Fixed crashes related to clicking on buffs before a character is loaded Fixed crashes related to selecting "No Buff" when choosing a new buff Fixed crashes related to clicking on a "Max" button on the buff tab before a character is loaded Cor...AcDown????? - Anime&Comic Downloader: AcDown????? v3.0 Beta8: ??AcDown???????????????,?????????????????????。????????????????????,??Acfun、Bilibili、???、???、?????,???????????、???????。 AcDown???????????????????????????,???,???????????????????。 AcDown???????C#??,?????"Acfun?????"。 ????32??64? Windows XP/Vista/7 ????????????? ??:????????Windows XP???,?????????.NET Framework 2.0???(x86)?.NET Framework 2.0???(x64),?????"?????????"??? ??????????????,??????????: ??"AcDown?????"????????? ??v3.0 Beta8 ?? ??????????????? ???????????????(??????????) ???????...BlogEngine.NET: BlogEngine.NET 2.5: Get DotNetBlogEngine for 3 Months Free! Click Here for More Info 3 Months FREE – BlogEngine.NET Hosting – Click Here! If you want to set up and start using BlogEngine.NET right away, you should download the Web project. If you want to extend or modify BlogEngine.NET, you should download the source code. If you are upgrading from a previous version of BlogEngine.NET, please take a look at the Upgrading to BlogEngine.NET 2.5 instructions. To get started, be sure to check out our installatio...PHP Manager for IIS: PHP Manager 1.2 for IIS 7: This release contains all the functionality available in 62183 plus the following additions: Command Line Support via PowerShell - now it is possible to manage and script PHP installations on IIS by using Windows PowerShell. More information is available at Managing PHP installations with PHP Manager command line. Detection and alert when using local PHP handler - if a web site or a directory has a local copy of PHP handler mapping then the configuration changes made on upper configuration ...MiniTwitter: 1.71: MiniTwitter 1.71 ???? ?? OAuth ???????????? ????????、??????????????????? ???????????????????????SizeOnDisk: 1.0.10.0: Fix: issue 327: size format error when save settings Fix: some UI bindings trouble (sorting, refresh) Fix: user settings file deletion when corrupted Feature: TreeView virtualization (better speed with many folders) Feature: New file type DataGrid column Feature: In KByte view, show size of file < 1024B and > 0 with 3 decimal Feature: New language: Italian Task: Cleanup for speedRawr: Rawr 4.2.0: This is the Downloadable WPF version of Rawr!For web-based version see http://elitistjerks.com/rawr.php You can find the version notes at: http://rawr.codeplex.com/wikipage?title=VersionNotes Rawr AddonWe now have a Rawr Official Addon for in-game exporting and importing of character data hosted on Curse. The Addon does not perform calculations like Rawr, it simply shows your exported Rawr data in wow tooltips and lets you export your character to Rawr (including bag and bank items) like Char...N2 CMS: 2.2: * Web platform installer support available ** Nuget support available What's newDinamico Templates (beta) - an MVC3 & Razor based template pack using the template-first! development paradigm Boilerplate CSS & HTML5 Advanced theming with css comipilation (concrete, dark, roadwork, terracotta) Template-first! development style Content, news, listing, slider, image sizes, search, sitemap, globalization, youtube, google map Display Tokens - replaces text tokens with rendered content (usag...KinectNUI: Jun 25 Alpha Release: Initial public version. No installer needed, just run the EXE.Terraria World Viewer: Version 1.5: Update June 24th Made compatible with the new tiles found in Terraria 1.0.5New Projects{Adjunct} functionality for the .NET framework: A project to provide Ingots for the .NET framework.3Webee.net: 3Webee.net is the First Navigator dedicated to Web.3.0 by P2P. Developped in C# for DotNet-3.5 or Mono.net, compatible with Linux ready. Website.fr : http://3webee.net/ Download Win32 : http://3webee.net/Download/3Webee.net.beta.0.0.Win32.exe AB Donor Choose Planner: The goal of this doantion planner is to allow you to coordinate the completion of one or more Donors Choose projects. The tool gives you a portfolio view of the donations you would like to invest in by targeting your investments in a location/regional focused manner.appperu1: asdasdsaddas: ColinTestingasdfFindClone: Find clone files, find duplicate files, remove duplicate filesfirstcpapp: This is my appForecast Parser: The NOAA hosts forecast data accessible over the web. These libraries download and parse seven day hourly forecast data and encapsulates the data in an easy to use class.Future Apple Osx: Future Apple Osx, Is a free operating system to use. It was built from the ground up with the help of Cosmos. It is free to use and download. So please check it out today.Glimpse: Glimpse is a web debugger and diagnostics tool for ASP.NET and ASP.NET MVC. You can find out more at getGlimpse.comiAdm: ?? iToday ??? wince 6 R2 ?????ImagineCup Worldwide Finals Tracker: An open-source Windows Phone application that is used to track the events going on at the ImagineCup Worldwide Finals.John Owl: John OwlLAM - Local Area Messaging: A VB.NET local area chat application. Finds the lan clients and communicates through the lan with old Ms-Winsock Interop.MessyBrain: Organize your tasks in an efficient way. Assign tasks to members of your team. Create workflows for your team. Written in C# and ASP.NET MVC. Why did I start this project? Making mistakes is part of the learning process. They can be painful especially when they are made at work; there’s a cost attached to it. Why not start a project on my own? Mistakes will be less painful (only my ego will be damaged), I learn something new and there isn’t a cost attached to it. I can share the code ...Navigation Light Toolkit: Navigation Light add support for View Navigation in WPF and SilverlightRight Click Calculator: a mini calculator with numpad that opens in a dialogbox. it can combined with a textbox. bir textbox üzerinde sag tus ile açabileceginiz ufak bir hesap makinesi örnegi.Shaaps & Ladders: It's a modern software implementation of the popular classic board game Snakes & Ladders. The Bengali translation of "Snakes" pronounces "Shaaps" and thus the name of the game is such. The game is being developed on top of the Shaaps & Ladders GDK. Source for both are released.SharePoint PowerShell Scripts: Usefull PowerShell scripts written for SharePoint that helps organizations with governance.Smith Web Tools: Smith Web Tools are some useful controls to help to build web application. They are written in pure JavaScript and CSS without introducing any other JavaScript framework. At present, the Smith Calendar, Smith Editor, and Smith Dialog are available.SSAS Query Log Decoder & Analyzer: The Crisp description for the project will be "CUBE FOR CUBE". This is an end-to-end BI solution for analyzing the Query log created by SSAS Server. The Query Log data is loaded into a dimensional model and a cube is built on top of it for analysis of cube usage.takcandmansys: takcandmansysTestHG1: TestHG1TESTProjHG: TESTProjHGTestTFS1: TestTFS1TESTTFSAAA: TESTTFSAAATower: tower showTransit Feed Generator: Library for help the integration with Google Transit. This library generates the zipped file with data for Google Transit Feed, in the GTFS formatVRE Collaborator Search Kit for SharePoint 2010: VRE Collaborator Search Kit for SharePoint 2010VRE Content Archiving Kit for SharePoint 2010: VRE Content Archiving Kit for SharePoint 2010VRE Document Review Workflow Kit for SharePoint 2010: VRE Document Review Workflow Kit for SharePoint 2010 VRE Literature Review Kit for SharePoint 2010: VRE Literature Review Kit for SharePoint 2010 VRE Researcher and Project Templates for SharePoint 2010: VRE Researcher and Project Templates for SharePoint 2010 VRE RSS Feeds Kit for SharePoint 2010: VRE RSS Feeds Kit for SharePoint 2010 VRE User Administration (FBA) Kit for SharePoint 2010: VRE User Administration (FBA) Kit for SharePoint 2010 WebPart Collapser: WebPart Collapser is a lightweight, customizable jQuery plugin for SharePoint 2007 that allows visitors to expand/collapse WebParts. Through the use of cookies, the collapsed state of any webparts will be saved and collapsed each time a user visits a page. WPF Hex Editor: hex editor which is created with WPF with a xaml designed UI.Xoorscript: A proprietary scripting language created by Jared Thomson for the purpose of script defining an easy to use make system. The plans for this project are minimal for now, but if things go well I may expand it. This is low priority for me.

    Read the article

  • Know more about Enqueue Deadlock Detection

    - by Liu Maclean(???)
    ??? ORACLE ALLSTAR???????????????????,??????? ???????enqueue lock?????????3 ??????,????????????????????????????ora-00060 dead lock??process???3s: SQL> select * from v$version; BANNER ---------------------------------------------------------------- Oracle Database 10g Enterprise Edition Release 10.2.0.5.0 - 64bi PL/SQL Release 10.2.0.5.0 - Production CORE 10.2.0.5.0 Production TNS for Linux: Version 10.2.0.5.0 - Production NLSRTL Version 10.2.0.5.0 - Production SQL> select * from global_name; GLOBAL_NAME -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- www.oracledatabase12g.com PROCESS A: set timing on; update maclean1 set t1=t1+1; PROCESS B: update maclean2 set t1=t1+1; PROCESS A: update maclean2 set t1=t1+1; PROCESS B: update maclean1 set t1=t1+1; ??3s? PROCESS A ?? ERROR at line 1: ORA-00060: deadlock detected while waiting for resource Elapsed: 00:00:03.02 ????Process A????????????? 3s,?????????????,??????? ?????????? ???????: SQL> col name for a30 SQL> col value for a5 SQL> col DESCRIB for a50 SQL> set linesize 140 pagesize 1400 SQL> SELECT x.ksppinm NAME, y.ksppstvl VALUE, x.ksppdesc describ 2 FROM SYS.x$ksppi x, SYS.x$ksppcv y 3 WHERE x.inst_id = USERENV ('Instance') 4 AND y.inst_id = USERENV ('Instance') 5 AND x.indx = y.indx 6 AND x.ksppinm='_enqueue_deadlock_scan_secs'; NAME VALUE DESCRIB ------------------------------ ----- -------------------------------------------------- _enqueue_deadlock_scan_secs 0 deadlock scan interval SQL> alter system set "_enqueue_deadlock_scan_secs"=18 scope=spfile; System altered. Elapsed: 00:00:00.01 SQL> startup force; ORACLE instance started. Total System Global Area 851443712 bytes Fixed Size 2100040 bytes Variable Size 738198712 bytes Database Buffers 104857600 bytes Redo Buffers 6287360 bytes Database mounted. Database opened. PROCESS A: SQL> set timing on; SQL> update maclean1 set t1=t1+1; 1 row updated. Elapsed: 00:00:00.06 Process B SQL> update maclean2 set t1=t1+1; 1 row updated. SQL> update maclean1 set t1=t1+1; Process A: SQL> SQL> alter session set events '10704 trace name context forever,level 10:10046 trace name context forever,level 8'; Session altered. SQL> update maclean2 set t1=t1+1; update maclean2 set t1=t1+1 * ERROR at line 1: ORA-00060: deadlock detected while waiting for resource  Elapsed: 00:00:18.05 ksqcmi: TX,90011,4a9 mode=6 timeout=21474836 WAIT #12: nam='enq: TX - row lock contention' ela= 2930070 name|mode=1415053318 usn<<16 | slot=589841 sequence=1193 obj#=56810 tim=1308114759849120 WAIT #12: nam='enq: TX - row lock contention' ela= 2930636 name|mode=1415053318 usn<<16 | slot=589841 sequence=1193 obj#=56810 tim=1308114762779801 WAIT #12: nam='enq: TX - row lock contention' ela= 2930439 name|mode=1415053318 usn<<16 | slot=589841 sequence=1193 obj#=56810 tim=1308114765710430 *** 2012-06-12 09:58:43.089 WAIT #12: nam='enq: TX - row lock contention' ela= 2931698 name|mode=1415053318 usn<<16 | slot=589841 sequence=1193 obj#=56810 tim=1308114768642192 WAIT #12: nam='enq: TX - row lock contention' ela= 2930428 name|mode=1415053318 usn<<16 | slot=589841 sequence=1193 obj#=56810 tim=1308114771572755 WAIT #12: nam='enq: TX - row lock contention' ela= 2931408 name|mode=1415053318 usn<<16 | slot=589841 sequence=1193 obj#=56810 tim=1308114774504207 DEADLOCK DETECTED ( ORA-00060 ) [Transaction Deadlock] The following deadlock is not an ORACLE error. It is a deadlock due to user error in the design of an application or from issuing incorrect ad-hoc SQL. The following information may aid in determining the deadlock: ??????Process A?’enq: TX – row lock contention’ ?????ORA-00060 deadlock detected????3s ??? 18s , ???hidden parameter “_enqueue_deadlock_scan_secs”?????,????????0? ??????????: SQL> alter system set "_enqueue_deadlock_scan_secs"=4 scope=spfile; System altered. Elapsed: 00:00:00.01 SQL> alter system set "_enqueue_deadlock_time_sec"=9 scope=spfile; System altered. Elapsed: 00:00:00.00 SQL> startup force; ORACLE instance started. Total System Global Area 851443712 bytes Fixed Size 2100040 bytes Variable Size 738198712 bytes Database Buffers 104857600 bytes Redo Buffers 6287360 bytes Database mounted. Database opened. SQL> set linesize 140 pagesize 1400 SQL> show parameter dead NAME TYPE VALUE ------------------------------------ -------------------------------- ------------------------------ _enqueue_deadlock_scan_secs integer 4 _enqueue_deadlock_time_sec integer 9 SQL> set timing on SQL> select * from maclean1 for update wait 8; T1 ---------- 11 Elapsed: 00:00:00.01 PROCESS B SQL> select * from maclean2 for update wait 8; T1 ---------- 3 SQL> select * from maclean1 for update wait 8; select * from maclean1 for update wait 8 PROCESS A SQL> select * from maclean2 for update wait 8; select * from maclean2 for update wait 8 * ERROR at line 1: ORA-30006: resource busy; acquire with WAIT timeout expired Elapsed: 00:00:08.00 ???????? ??? select for update wait?enqueue request timeout ?????8s? ,???????”_enqueue_deadlock_scan_secs”=4(deadlock scan interval),?4s???deadlock detected,????Process A????deadlock ???, ??????? ??Process A?????8s?raised??”ORA-30006: resource busy; acquire with WAIT timeout expired”??,??ORA-00060,?????process A???????? ????????”_enqueue_deadlock_time_sec”(requests with timeout <= this will not have deadlock detection)???,?enqueue request time < “_enqueue_deadlock_time_sec”?Server process?????dead lock detection,?????????enqueue request ??????timeout??????(_enqueue_deadlock_time_sec????5,?timeout<5s),???????????????;??????timeout>”_enqueue_deadlock_time_sec”???,Oracle????????????????????? ??????????: SQL> show parameter dead NAME TYPE VALUE ------------------------------------ -------------------------------- ------------------------------ _enqueue_deadlock_scan_secs integer 4 _enqueue_deadlock_time_sec integer 9 Process A: SQL> set timing on; SQL> select * from maclean1 for update wait 10; T1 ---------- 11 Process B: SQL> select * from maclean2 for update wait 10; T1 ---------- 3 SQL> select * from maclean1 for update wait 10; PROCESS A: SQL> select * from maclean2 for update wait 10; select * from maclean2 for update wait 10 * ERROR at line 1: ORA-00060: deadlock detected while waiting for resource Elapsed: 00:00:06.02 ??????? select for update wait 10?10s??, ?? 10s?????_enqueue_deadlock_time_sec???(9s),??Process A???????? ???????????????6s ???????_enqueue_deadlock_scan_secs?4s ? ???????????,???????????_enqueue_deadlock_scan_secs?????????3???? ??: enqueue lock?????????????? 1. ?????????deadlock detection??3s????, ????????_enqueue_deadlock_scan_secs(deadlock scan interval)???,??????0,????????_enqueue_deadlock_scan_secs?????????3???, ?_enqueue_deadlock_scan_secs=0 ??3s??, ?_enqueue_deadlock_scan_secs=4??6s??,????? 2. ???????_enqueue_deadlock_time_sec(requests with timeout <= this will not have deadlock detection)???,?enqueue request timeout< _enqueue_deadlock_time_sec(????5),?Server process?????????enqueue request timeout>_enqueue_deadlock_time_sec ????_enqueue_deadlock_scan_secs???????, ??request timeout??????select for update wait [TIMEOUT]??? ??: ???10.2.0.1?????????2?hidden parameter , ???patchset 10.2.0.3????? _enqueue_deadlock_time_sec, ?patchset 10.2.0.5??????_enqueue_deadlock_scan_secs? ?????RAC???????????10s, ???????_lm_dd_interval(dd time interval in seconds) ,????????8.0.6???? ???????????????,??????,  ?10g???????60s,?11g???????10s?  ???????11g??_lm_dd_interval?????????????,?????11g??LMD????????????,??????????RAC?LMD?Deadlock Detection???????CPU,???11g?Oracle????Team???LMD????????CPU????: ????????11g?LMD???????,???????11g??? UTS TRACE ????? DD???: SQL> select * from v$version; BANNER -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Oracle Database 11g Enterprise Edition Release 11.2.0.3.0 - 64bit Production PL/SQL Release 11.2.0.3.0 - Production CORE 11.2.0.3.0 Production TNS for Linux: Version 11.2.0.3.0 - Production NLSRTL Version 11.2.0.3.0 - Production SQL> SQL> select * from global_name 2 ; GLOBAL_NAME -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- www.oracledatabase12g.com SQL> alter system set "_lm_dd_interval"=20 scope=spfile; System altered. SQL> startup force; ORACLE instance started. Total System Global Area 1570009088 bytes Fixed Size 2228704 bytes Variable Size 1325403680 bytes Database Buffers 234881024 bytes Redo Buffers 7495680 bytes Database mounted. Database opened. SQL> set linesize 140 pagesize 1400 SQL> show parameter lm_dd NAME TYPE VALUE ------------------------------------ -------------------------------- ------------------------------ _lm_dd_interval integer 20 SQL> select count(*) from gv$instance; COUNT(*) ---------- 2 instance 1: SQL> oradebug setorapid 12 Oracle pid: 12, Unix process pid: 8608, image: [email protected] (LMD0) ? LMD0??? UTS TRACE??RAC???????????? SQL> oradebug event 10046 trace name context forever,level 8:10708 trace name context forever,level 103: trace[rac.*] disk high; Statement processed. Elapsed: 00:00:00.00 SQL> update maclean1 set t1=t1+1; 1 row updated. instance 2: SQL> update maclean2 set t1=t1+1; 1 row updated. SQL> update maclean1 set t1=t1+1; Instance 1: SQL> update maclean2 set t1=t1+1; update maclean2 set t1=t1+1 * ERROR at line 1: ORA-00060: deadlock detected while waiting for resource Elapsed: 00:00:20.51 LMD0???UTS TRACE 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929284 : [kjmpbmsg:process][type 22][msg 0x7fa620ac85a8][from 1][seq 8148.0][len 192] 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929346 : [kjmxmpm][type 22][seq 0.0][msg 0x7fa620ac85a8][from 1] *** 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929 * kjddind: received DDIND msg with subtype x6 * reqp->dd_master_inst_kjxmddi == 1 * kjddind: dump sgh: 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929346*: kjddind: req->timestamp [0.15], kjddt [0.13] 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929346*: >> DDmsg:KJX_DD_REMOTE,TS[0.15],Inst 1->2,ddxid[id1,id2,inst:2097153,31,1],ddlock[0x95023930,829],ddMasterInst 1 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929346*: lock [0x95023930,829], op = [mast] 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929346*: reqp->timestamp [0.15], kjddt [0.13] 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929346*: kjddind: updated local timestamp [0.15] * kjddind: case KJX_DD_REMOTE 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929346*: ADD IO NODE WFG: 0 frame pointer 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929346*: PUSH: type=res, enqueue(0xffffffff.0xffffffff)=0xbbb9af40, block=KJUSEREX, snode=1 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929346*: PROCESS: type=res, enqueue(0xffffffff.0xffffffff)=0xbbb9af40, block=KJUSEREX, snode=1 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929346*: POP: type=res, enqueue(0xffffffff.0xffffffff)=0xbbb9af40, block=KJUSEREX, snode=1 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929346*: kjddopr[TX 0xe000c.0x32][ext 0x5,0x0]: blocking lock 0xbbb9a800, owner 2097154 of inst 2 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929346*: PUSH: type=txn, enqueue(0xffffffff.0xffffffff)=0xbbb9a800, block=KJUSEREX, snode=1 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929346*: PROCESS: type=txn, enqueue(0xffffffff.0xffffffff)=0xbbb9a800, block=KJUSEREX, snode=1 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929346*: ADD NODE TO WFG: type=txn, enqueue(0xffffffff.0xffffffff)=0xbbb9a800, block=KJUSEREX, snode=1 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929346*: POP: type=txn, enqueue(0xffffffff.0xffffffff)=0xbbb9a800, block=KJUSEREX, snode=1 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929346*: kjddopt: converting lock 0xbbce92f8 on 'TX' 0x80016.0x5d4,txid [2097154,34]of inst 2 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929346*: PUSH: type=res, enqueue(0xffffffff.0xffffffff)=0xbbce92f8, block=KJUSEREX, snode=1 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929346*: PROCESS: type=res, enqueue(0xffffffff.0xffffffff)=0xbbce92f8, block=KJUSEREX, snode=1 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929346*: ADD NODE TO WFG: type=res, enqueue(0xffffffff.0xffffffff)=0xbbce92f8, block=KJUSEREX, snode=1 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929855 : GSIPC:AMBUF: rcv buff 0x7fa620aa8cd8, pool rcvbuf, rqlen 1102 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929878 : GSIPC:GPBMSG: new bmsg 0x7fa620aa8d48 mb 0x7fa620aa8cd8 msg 0x7fa620aa8d68 mlen 192 dest x100 flushsz -1 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929878*: << DDmsg:KJX_DD_REMOTE,TS[0.15],Inst 2->1,ddxid[id1,id2,inst:2097153,31,1],ddlock[0x95023930,829],ddMasterInst 1 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929878*: lock [0xbbce92f8,287], op = [mast] 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929878*: ADD IO NODE WFG: 0 frame pointer 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929923 : [kjmpbmsg:compl][msg 0x7fa620ac8588][typ p][nmsgs 1][qtime 0][ptime 0] 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929947 : GSIPC:PBAT: flush start. flag 0x79 end 0 inc 4.4 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929963 : GSIPC:PBAT: send bmsg 0x7fa620aa8d48 blen 224 dest 1.0 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929979 : GSIPC:SNDQ: enq msg 0x7fa620aa8d48, type 65521 seq 8325, inst 1, receiver 0, queued 1 012-06-12 22:27:00.929979 : GSIPC:SNDQ: enq msg 0x7fa620aa8d48, type 65521 seq 8325, inst 1, receiver 0, queued 1 2012-06-12 22:27:00.929996 : GSIPC:BSEND: flushing sndq 0xb491dd28, id 0, dcx 0xbc517770, inst 1, rcvr 0 qlen 0 1 2012-06-12 22:27:00.930014 : GSIPC:BSEND: no batch1 msg 0x7fa620aa8d48 type 65521 len 224 dest (1:0) 2012-06-12 22:27:00.930088 : kjbsentscn[0x0.3f72dc][to 1] 2012-06-12 22:27:00.930144 : GSIPC:SENDM: send msg 0x7fa620aa8d48 dest x10000 seq 8325 type 65521 tkts x1 mlen xe00110 2012-06-12 22:27:00.930531 : GSIPC:KSXPCB: msg 0x7fa620aa8d48 status 30, type 65521, dest 1, rcvr 0 WAIT #0: nam='ges remote message' ela= 1372 waittime=80 loop=0 p3=74 obj#=-1 tim=1339554420931640 2012-06-12 22:27:00.931728 : GSIPC:RCVD: ksxp msg 0x7fa620af6490 sndr 1 seq 0.8149 type 65521 tkts 1 2012-06-12 22:27:00.931746 : GSIPC:RCVD: watq msg 0x7fa620af6490 sndr 1, seq 8149, type 65521, tkts 1 2012-06-12 22:27:00.931763 : GSIPC:RCVD: seq update (0.8148)->(0.8149) tp -15 fg 0x4 from 1 pbattr 0x0 2012-06-12 22:27:00.931779 : GSIPC:TKT: collect msg 0x7fa620af6490 from 1 for rcvr 0, tickets 1 2012-06-12 22:27:00.931794 : kjbrcvdscn[0x0.3f72dc][from 1][idx 2012-06-12 22:27:00.931810 : kjbrcvdscn[no bscn dd_master_inst_kjxmddi == 1 * kjddind: dump sgh: NXTIN (nil) 0 wq 0 cvtops x0 0x0.0x0(ext 0x0,0x0)[0000-0000-00000000] inst 1 BLOCKER 0xbbb9a800 5 wq 1 cvtops x28 TX 0xe000c.0x32(ext 0x5,0x0)[20000-0002-00000022] inst 2 BLOCKED 0xbbce92f8 5 wq 2 cvtops x1 TX 0x80016.0x5d4(ext 0x2,0x0)[20000-0002-00000022] inst 2 NXTOUT (nil) 0 wq 0 cvtops x0 0x0.0x0(ext 0x0,0x0)[0000-0000-00000000] inst 1 2012-06-12 22:27:00.932058*: kjddind: req->timestamp [0.15], kjddt [0.15] 2012-06-12 22:27:00.932058*: >> DDmsg:KJX_DD_VALIDATE,TS[0.15],Inst 1->2,ddxid[id1,id2,inst:2097153,31,1],ddlock[0x95023930,829],ddMasterInst 1 2012-06-12 22:27:00.932058*: lock [(nil),0], op = [vald_dd] 2012-06-12 22:27:00.932058*: kjddind: updated local timestamp [0.15] * kjddind: case KJX_DD_VALIDATE *** 2012-06-12 22:27:00.932 * kjddvald called: kjxmddi stuff: * cont_lockp (nil) * dd_lockp 0x95023930 * dd_inst 1 * dd_master_inst 1 * sgh graph: NXTIN (nil) 0 wq 0 cvtops x0 0x0.0x0(ext 0x0,0x0)[0000-0000-00000000] inst 1 BLOCKER 0xbbb9a800 5 wq 1 cvtops x28 TX 0xe000c.0x32(ext 0x5,0x0)[20000-0002-00000022] inst 2 BLOCKED 0xbbce92f8 5 wq 2 cvtops x1 TX 0x80016.0x5d4(ext 0x2,0x0)[20000-0002-00000022] inst 2 NXTOUT (nil) 0 wq 0 cvtops x0 0x0.0x0(ext 0x0,0x0)[0000-0000-00000000] inst 1 POP WFG NODE: lock=(nil) * kjddvald: dump the PRQ: BLOCKER 0xbbb9a800 5 wq 1 cvtops x28 TX 0xe000c.0x32(ext 0x5,0x0)[20000-0002-00000022] inst 2 BLOCKED 0xbbce92f8 5 wq 2 cvtops x1 TX 0x80016.0x5d4(ext 0x2,0x0)[20000-0002-00000022] inst 2 * kjddvald: KJDD_NXTONOD ->node_kjddsg.dinst_kjddnd =1 * kjddvald: ... which is not my node, my subgraph is validated but the cycle is not complete Global blockers dump start:--------------------------------- DUMP LOCAL BLOCKER/HOLDER: block level 5 res [0x80016][0x5d4],[TX][ext 0x2,0x0] ??dead lock!!! ???????11.2.0.3???? RAC LMD???????????”_lm_dd_interval”????????????20s?  ???????10g?_lm_dd_interval???60s,??????Processes?????????????????,????????????Server Process????????60s??????11g?????(??????LMD???????)???????,???????????10s??? Enqueue Deadlock Detection? ?11g??? RAC?LMD???????hidden parameter ????”_lm_dd_interval”???,RAC????????????????,???????????: SQL> col name for a50 SQL> col describ for a60 SQL> col value for a20 SQL> set linesize 140 pagesize 1400 SQL> SELECT x.ksppinm NAME, y.ksppstvl VALUE, x.ksppdesc describ 2 FROM SYS.x$ksppi x, SYS.x$ksppcv y 3 WHERE x.inst_id = USERENV ('Instance') 4 AND y.inst_id = USERENV ('Instance') 5 AND x.indx = y.indx 6 AND x.ksppinm like '_lm_dd%'; NAME VALUE DESCRIB -------------------------------------------------- -------------------- ------------------------------------------------------------ _lm_dd_interval 20 dd time interval in seconds _lm_dd_scan_interval 5 dd scan interval in seconds _lm_dd_search_cnt 3 number of dd search per token get _lm_dd_max_search_time 180 max dd search time per token _lm_dd_maxdump 50 max number of locks to be dumped during dd validation _lm_dd_ignore_nodd FALSE if TRUE nodeadlockwait/nodeadlockblock options are ignored 6 rows selected.

    Read the article

  • Dual booting on separate hard drives

    - by tornadorider
    I have windows XP professional installed on 1 hard drive and Ubuntu 10.10 on my second hard drive. On start up the computer completely skips the grub menu and boots straight into 10.10. I have tried running os-prober with the windows hard drive mounted and then updating grub but it didnt work. Any ideas? I have changed the boot order so that the HDD with xp on it is first however the computer still booted into linux. I tried running grub-install /dev/sda and got this /usr/sbin/grub-setup: warn: Sector 32 is already in use by FlexNet; avoiding it. This software may cause boot or other problems in future. Please ask its authors not to store data in the boot track.. /usr/sbin/grub-setup: warn: Sector 33 is already in use by FlexNet; avoiding it. This software may cause boot or other problems in future. Please ask its authors not to store data in the boot track.. Installation finished. No error reported I checked using disk utility and the code for my xp hard drive is sdb so i ran the camand grub-install /dev/sdb shich gave me this Installation finished. No error reported. So i rebooted but it still didnt work. Any other ideas? Additional info gedit /boot/grub/grub.cfg: # # DO NOT EDIT THIS FILE # # It is automatically generated by grub-mkconfig using templates # from /etc/grub.d and settings from /etc/default/grub # ### BEGIN /etc/grub.d/00_header ### if [ -s $prefix/grubenv ]; then set have_grubenv=true load_env fi set default="0" if [ "${prev_saved_entry}" ]; then set saved_entry="${prev_saved_entry}" save_env saved_entry set prev_saved_entry= save_env prev_saved_entry set boot_once=true fi function savedefault { if [ -z "${boot_once}" ]; then saved_entry="${chosen}" save_env saved_entry fi } function recordfail { set recordfail=1 if [ -n "${have_grubenv}" ]; then if [ -z "${boot_once}" ]; then save_env recordfail; fi; fi } function load_video { insmod vbe insmod vga } insmod part_msdos insmod ext2 set root='(hd0,msdos1)' search --no-floppy --fs-uuid --set d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c if loadfont /usr/share/grub/unicode.pf2 ; then set gfxmode=640x480 load_video insmod gfxterm fi terminal_output gfxterm insmod part_msdos insmod ext2 set root='(hd0,msdos1)' search --no-floppy --fs-uuid --set d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c set locale_dir=($root)/boot/grub/locale set lang=en insmod gettext if [ "${recordfail}" = 1 ]; then set timeout=-1 else set timeout=10 fi ### END /etc/grub.d/00_header ### ### BEGIN /etc/grub.d/05_debian_theme ### set menu_color_normal=white/black set menu_color_highlight=black/light-gray ### END /etc/grub.d/05_debian_theme ### ### BEGIN /etc/grub.d/10_linux ### menuentry 'Ubuntu, with Linux 2.6.35-28-generic' --class ubuntu --class gnu-linux --class gnu --class os { recordfail insmod part_msdos insmod ext2 set root='(hd0,msdos1)' search --no-floppy --fs-uuid --set d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c linux /boot/vmlinuz-2.6.35-28-generic root=UUID=d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c ro quiet splash initrd /boot/initrd.img-2.6.35-28-generic } menuentry 'Ubuntu, with Linux 2.6.35-28-generic (recovery mode)' --class ubuntu --class gnu-linux --class gnu --class os { recordfail insmod part_msdos insmod ext2 set root='(hd0,msdos1)' search --no-floppy --fs-uuid --set d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c echo 'Loading Linux 2.6.35-28-generic ...' linux /boot/vmlinuz-2.6.35-28-generic root=UUID=d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c ro single echo 'Loading initial ramdisk ...' initrd /boot/initrd.img-2.6.35-28-generic } menuentry 'Ubuntu, with Linux 2.6.35-22-generic' --class ubuntu --class gnu-linux --class gnu --class os { recordfail insmod part_msdos insmod ext2 set root='(hd0,msdos1)' search --no-floppy --fs-uuid --set d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c linux /boot/vmlinuz-2.6.35-22-generic root=UUID=d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c ro quiet splash initrd /boot/initrd.img-2.6.35-22-generic } menuentry 'Ubuntu, with Linux 2.6.35-22-generic (recovery mode)' --class ubuntu --class gnu-linux --class gnu --class os { recordfail insmod part_msdos insmod ext2 set root='(hd0,msdos1)' search --no-floppy --fs-uuid --set d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c echo 'Loading Linux 2.6.35-22-generic ...' linux /boot/vmlinuz-2.6.35-22-generic root=UUID=d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c ro single echo 'Loading initial ramdisk ...' initrd /boot/initrd.img-2.6.35-22-generic } ### END /etc/grub.d/10_linux ### ### BEGIN /etc/grub.d/20_linux_xen ### ### END /etc/grub.d/20_linux_xen ### ### BEGIN /etc/grub.d/20_memtest86+ ### menuentry "Memory test (memtest86+)" { insmod part_msdos insmod ext2 set root='(hd0,msdos1)' search --no-floppy --fs-uuid --set d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c linux16 /boot/memtest86+.bin } menuentry "Memory test (memtest86+, serial console 115200)" { insmod part_msdos insmod ext2 set root='(hd0,msdos1)' search --no-floppy --fs-uuid --set d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c linux16 /boot/memtest86+.bin console=ttyS0,115200n8 } ### END /etc/grub.d/20_memtest86+ ### ### BEGIN /etc/grub.d/30_os-prober ### if [ "x${timeout}" != "x-1" ]; then if keystatus; then if keystatus --shift; then set timeout=-1 else set timeout=0 fi else if sleep --interruptible 3 ; then set timeout=0 fi fi fi ### END /etc/grub.d/30_os-prober ### ### BEGIN /etc/grub.d/40_custom ### # This file provides an easy way to add custom menu entries. Simply type the # menu entries you want to add after this comment. Be careful not to change # the 'exec tail' line above. ### END /etc/grub.d/40_custom ### ### BEGIN /etc/grub.d/41_custom ### if [ -f $prefix/custom.cfg ]; then source $prefix/custom.cfg; fi ### END /etc/grub.d/41_custom ### sudo fdisk -l: Disk /dev/sda: 80.1 GB, 80060424192 bytes 255 heads, 63 sectors/track, 9733 cylinders Units = cylinders of 16065 * 512 = 8225280 bytes Sector size (logical/physical): 512 bytes / 512 bytes I/O size (minimum/optimal): 512 bytes / 512 bytes Disk identifier: 0x0008a483 Device Boot Start End Blocks Id System /dev/sda1 * 1 9352 75112448 83 Linux /dev/sda2 9352 9734 3068929 5 Extended /dev/sda5 9352 9734 3068928 82 Linux swap / Solaris Disk /dev/sdb: 500.1 GB, 500107862016 bytes 255 heads, 63 sectors/track, 60801 cylinders Units = cylinders of 16065 * 512 = 8225280 bytes Sector size (logical/physical): 512 bytes / 512 bytes I/O size (minimum/optimal): 512 bytes / 512 bytes Disk identifier: 0xc5d6c5d6 Device Boot Start End Blocks Id System /dev/sdb1 1 60800 488375968+ 7 HPFS/NTFS sudo blkid /dev/sda1: UUID="d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c" TYPE="ext4" /dev/sda5: UUID="09e9c2cb-d903-4f0b-a181-536951845231" TYPE="swap" /dev/sdb1: UUID="B21844EB1844AFE1" TYPE="ntfs" sudo os-prober (nothing) Boot Info Script 0.55 dated February 15th, 2010 ============================= Boot Info Summary: ============================== => Grub 2 is installed in the MBR of /dev/sda and looks on the same drive in partition #1 for (,msdos1)/boot/grub. => Grub 2 is installed in the MBR of /dev/sdb and looks on the same drive in partition #1 for (,msdos1)/boot/grub. sda1: _________________________________________________________________________ File system: ext4 Boot sector type: - Boot sector info: Operating System: Ubuntu 10.10 Boot files/dirs: /boot/grub/grub.cfg /etc/fstab /boot/grub/core.img sda2: _________________________________________________________________________ File system: Extended Partition Boot sector type: Unknown Boot sector info: sda5: _________________________________________________________________________ File system: swap Boot sector type: - Boot sector info: sdb1: _________________________________________________________________________ File system: ntfs Boot sector type: Windows XP Boot sector info: No errors found in the Boot Parameter Block. Operating System: Windows XP Boot files/dirs: =========================== Drive/Partition Info: ============================= Drive: sda ___________________ _____________________________________________________ Disk /dev/sda: 80.1 GB, 80060424192 bytes 255 heads, 63 sectors/track, 9733 cylinders, total 156368016 sectors Units = sectors of 1 * 512 = 512 bytes Sector size (logical/physical): 512 bytes / 512 bytes Partition Boot Start End Size Id System /dev/sda1 * 2,048 150,226,943 150,224,896 83 Linux /dev/sda2 150,228,990 156,366,847 6,137,858 5 Extended /dev/sda5 150,228,992 156,366,847 6,137,856 82 Linux swap / Solaris Drive: sdb ___________________ _____________________________________________________ Disk /dev/sdb: 500.1 GB, 500107862016 bytes 255 heads, 63 sectors/track, 60801 cylinders, total 976773168 sectors Units = sectors of 1 * 512 = 512 bytes Sector size (logical/physical): 512 bytes / 512 bytes Partition Boot Start End Size Id System /dev/sdb1 * 63 976,751,999 976,751,937 7 HPFS/NTFS blkid -c /dev/null: ____________________________________________________________ Device UUID TYPE LABEL /dev/sda1 d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c ext4 /dev/sda2: PTTYPE="dos" /dev/sda5 09e9c2cb-d903-4f0b-a181-536951845231 swap /dev/sda: PTTYPE="dos" /dev/sdb1 B21844EB1844AFE1 ntfs /dev/sdb: PTTYPE="dos" ============================ "mount | grep ^/dev output: =========================== Device Mount_Point Type Options /dev/sda1 / ext4 (rw,errors=remount-ro,commit=0) =========================== sda1/boot/grub/grub.cfg: =========================== # # DO NOT EDIT THIS FILE # # It is automatically generated by grub-mkconfig using templates # from /etc/grub.d and settings from /etc/default/grub # ### BEGIN /etc/grub.d/00_header ### if [ -s $prefix/grubenv ]; then set have_grubenv=true load_env fi set default="0" if [ "${prev_saved_entry}" ]; then set saved_entry="${prev_saved_entry}" save_env saved_entry set prev_saved_entry= save_env prev_saved_entry set boot_once=true fi function savedefault { if [ -z "${boot_once}" ]; then saved_entry="${chosen}" save_env saved_entry fi } function recordfail { set recordfail=1 if [ -n "${have_grubenv}" ]; then if [ -z "${boot_once}" ]; then save_env recordfail; fi; fi } function load_video { insmod vbe insmod vga } insmod part_msdos insmod ext2 set root='(hd0,msdos1)' search --no-floppy --fs-uuid --set d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c if loadfont /usr/share/grub/unicode.pf2 ; then set gfxmode=640x480 load_video insmod gfxterm fi terminal_output gfxterm insmod part_msdos insmod ext2 set root='(hd0,msdos1)' search --no-floppy --fs-uuid --set d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c set locale_dir=($root)/boot/grub/locale set lang=en insmod gettext if [ "${recordfail}" = 1 ]; then set timeout=-1 else set timeout=10 fi ### END /etc/grub.d/00_header ### ### BEGIN /etc/grub.d/05_debian_theme ### set menu_color_normal=white/black set menu_color_highlight=black/light-gray ### END /etc/grub.d/05_debian_theme ### ### BEGIN /etc/grub.d/10_linux ### menuentry 'Ubuntu, with Linux 2.6.35-28-generic' --class ubuntu --class gnu-linux --class gnu --class os { recordfail insmod part_msdos insmod ext2 set root='(hd0,msdos1)' search --no-floppy --fs-uuid --set d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c linux /boot/vmlinuz-2.6.35-28-generic root=UUID=d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c ro quiet splash initrd /boot/initrd.img-2.6.35-28-generic } menuentry 'Ubuntu, with Linux 2.6.35-28-generic (recovery mode)' --class ubuntu --class gnu-linux --class gnu --class os { recordfail insmod part_msdos insmod ext2 set root='(hd0,msdos1)' search --no-floppy --fs-uuid --set d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c echo 'Loading Linux 2.6.35-28-generic ...' linux /boot/vmlinuz-2.6.35-28-generic root=UUID=d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c ro single echo 'Loading initial ramdisk ...' initrd /boot/initrd.img-2.6.35-28-generic } menuentry 'Ubuntu, with Linux 2.6.35-22-generic' --class ubuntu --class gnu-linux --class gnu --class os { recordfail insmod part_msdos insmod ext2 set root='(hd0,msdos1)' search --no-floppy --fs-uuid --set d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c linux /boot/vmlinuz-2.6.35-22-generic root=UUID=d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c ro quiet splash initrd /boot/initrd.img-2.6.35-22-generic } menuentry 'Ubuntu, with Linux 2.6.35-22-generic (recovery mode)' --class ubuntu --class gnu-linux --class gnu --class os { recordfail insmod part_msdos insmod ext2 set root='(hd0,msdos1)' search --no-floppy --fs-uuid --set d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c echo 'Loading Linux 2.6.35-22-generic ...' linux /boot/vmlinuz-2.6.35-22-generic root=UUID=d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c ro single echo 'Loading initial ramdisk ...' initrd /boot/initrd.img-2.6.35-22-generic } ### END /etc/grub.d/10_linux ### ### BEGIN /etc/grub.d/20_linux_xen ### ### END /etc/grub.d/20_linux_xen ### ### BEGIN /etc/grub.d/20_memtest86+ ### menuentry "Memory test (memtest86+)" { insmod part_msdos insmod ext2 set root='(hd0,msdos1)' search --no-floppy --fs-uuid --set d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c linux16 /boot/memtest86+.bin } menuentry "Memory test (memtest86+, serial console 115200)" { insmod part_msdos insmod ext2 set root='(hd0,msdos1)' search --no-floppy --fs-uuid --set d682c9bd-dd89-4827-9802-a1f921ebe21c linux16 /boot/memtest86+.bin console=ttyS0,115200n8 } ### END /etc/grub.d/20_memtest86+ ### ### BEGIN /etc/grub.d/30_os-prober ### if [ "x${timeout}" != "x-1" ]; then if keystatus; then if keystatus --shift; then set timeout=-1 else set timeout=0 fi else if sleep --interruptible 3 ; then set timeout=0 fi fi fi ### END /etc/grub.d/30_os-prober ### ### BEGIN /etc/grub.d/40_custom ### # This file provides an easy way to add custom menu entries. Simply type the # menu entries you want to add after this comment. Be careful not to change # the 'exec tail' line above. menuentry "Windows XP" { set root=(hd1,1) chainloader (hd1,1)+1 } ### END /etc/grub.d/40_custom ### ### BEGIN /etc/grub.d/41_custom ### if [ -f $prefix/custom.cfg ]; then source $prefix/custom.cfg; fi ### END /etc/grub.d/41_custom ### =============================== sda1/etc/fstab: =============================== # /etc/fstab: static file system information. # # Use 'blkid -o value -s UUID' to print the universally unique identifier # for a device; this may be used with UUID= as a more robust way to name # devices that works even if disks are added and removed. See fstab(5). # # <file system> <mount point> <type> <options> <dump> <pass> proc /proc proc nodev,noexec,nosuid 0 0 /dev/sda1 / ext4 errors=remount-ro 0 1 # swap was on /dev/sda5 during installation UUID=09e9c2cb-d903-4f0b-a181-536951845231 none swap sw 0 0 =================== sda1: Location of files loaded by Grub: =================== 51.7GB: boot/grub/core.img 58.5GB: boot/grub/grub.cfg 1.2GB: boot/initrd.img-2.6.35-22-generic 1.3GB: boot/initrd.img-2.6.35-28-generic 58.2GB: boot/vmlinuz-2.6.35-22-generic 51.7GB: boot/vmlinuz-2.6.35-28-generic 1.3GB: initrd.img 1.2GB: initrd.img.old 51.7GB: vmlinuz 58.2GB: vmlinuz.old =========================== Unknown MBRs/Boot Sectors/etc ======================= Unknown BootLoader on sda2 00000000 d9 ed 13 ab ff a8 33 8c 01 b2 47 99 e1 4a b1 f1 |......3...G..J..| 00000010 69 5f a7 29 a4 1a 03 9e 31 b9 45 02 71 e6 58 78 |i_.)....1.E.q.Xx| 00000020 3d f6 ee 7b 3e 33 1b 82 c6 7d cf 1a c8 e7 bc 2f |=..{>3...}...../| 00000030 b9 e1 70 75 cf 18 aa e7 d5 7e 3c f1 b4 e7 9e 3a |..pu.....~<....:| 00000040 55 38 f1 b4 ee 78 59 0b 5e f7 3c 4c 57 73 9c 2a |U8...xY.^.<LWs.*| 00000050 28 f1 19 ed 11 9c b2 19 e2 80 92 1c 7b 84 ee 0b |(...........{...| 00000060 e2 c0 ac af 0a 50 42 b9 cf 0c dc 2c 20 77 85 dc |.....PB...., w..| 00000070 8f 70 5f 7b 84 9b a1 f7 8c 2d ee 70 5c ae f7 39 |.p_{.....-.p\..9| 00000080 63 f7 09 8a ec 79 4c ed 9f cc ad 3c f8 1b 47 7d |c....yL....<..G}| 00000090 3f 97 d5 16 cb 29 45 38 25 61 36 08 de 10 93 0f |?....)E8%a6.....| 000000a0 95 4f ea 54 f9 89 ff f1 bf 9a cc bb fd b6 22 b1 |.O.T..........".| 000000b0 65 08 05 21 78 19 46 b0 24 7e fb de d4 b3 ba d6 |e..!x.F.$~......| 000000c0 ec 11 65 82 ee 10 1d 12 04 91 da 6d 67 47 ea 9b |..e........mgG..| 000000d0 6f b0 aa fb cb 67 10 64 86 e8 26 85 fb f9 50 77 |o....g.d..&...Pw| 000000e0 9d 13 9b 9e d9 11 f3 a1 50 1b 11 b7 93 79 9f ab |........P....y..| 000000f0 c1 b6 86 0f 35 ed d4 9f dc f8 db bd ed 45 3a 68 |....5........E:h| 00000100 54 68 4a 1d d1 fc b8 c9 72 b4 d7 7b 60 e7 39 2f |ThJ.....r..{`.9/| 00000110 2a 0a 4e 52 72 52 c6 e2 2a 55 6a 2a e1 82 40 71 |*.NRrR..*Uj*..@q| 00000120 11 11 e0 53 d6 ff 1b a9 c6 65 df 1e b7 15 6f a2 |...S.....e....o.| 00000130 15 02 a4 6d 19 b7 78 57 a6 ee 9e 36 08 7d 6f 7c |...m..xW...6.}o|| 00000140 fd f7 7c d5 40 ff 0f c7 97 dc aa 00 ce 8b bb dc |..|.@...........| 00000150 e2 eb 1c 50 74 d8 14 cc 9a d6 5c a2 ab f2 67 f9 |...Pt.....\...g.| 00000160 58 ed 43 79 0e 78 7a 5c a6 f8 7b e8 05 4e 62 8a |X.Cy.xz\..{..Nb.| 00000170 0a 5f 22 ee a6 38 b9 e1 32 45 97 08 cc 75 66 c6 |._"..8..2E...uf.| 00000180 b3 a2 2d 89 a1 e9 95 21 28 53 fd dd be b1 b2 a2 |..-....!(S......| 00000190 78 3f a3 c9 3d e3 31 54 88 cf 78 0d e1 21 a8 74 |x?..=.1T..x..!.t| 000001a0 06 60 9d 21 c6 7a 24 e1 cc 28 f8 98 e0 99 e3 fc |.`.!.z$..(......| 000001b0 fa 8b eb d5 56 03 20 b8 54 ba c6 ee 9f 57 00 fe |....V. .T....W..| 000001c0 ff ff 82 fe ff ff 02 00 00 00 00 a8 5d 00 00 00 |............]...| 000001d0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 |................| * 000001f0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 55 aa |..............U.| 00000200

    Read the article

  • Currency Conversion in Oracle BI applications

    - by Saurabh Verma
    Authored by Vijay Aggarwal and Hichem Sellami A typical data warehouse contains Star and/or Snowflake schema, made up of Dimensions and Facts. The facts store various numerical information including amounts. Example; Order Amount, Invoice Amount etc. With the true global nature of business now-a-days, the end-users want to view the reports in their own currency or in global/common currency as defined by their business. This presents a unique opportunity in BI to provide the amounts in converted rates either by pre-storing or by doing on-the-fly conversions while displaying the reports to the users. Source Systems OBIA caters to various source systems like EBS, PSFT, Sebl, JDE, Fusion etc. Each source has its own unique and intricate ways of defining and storing currency data, doing currency conversions and presenting to the OLTP users. For example; EBS stores conversion rates between currencies which can be classified by conversion rates, like Corporate rate, Spot rate, Period rate etc. Siebel stores exchange rates by conversion rates like Daily. EBS/Fusion stores the conversion rates for each day, where as PSFT/Siebel store for a range of days. PSFT has Rate Multiplication Factor and Rate Division Factor and we need to calculate the Rate based on them, where as other Source systems store the Currency Exchange Rate directly. OBIA Design The data consolidation from various disparate source systems, poses the challenge to conform various currencies, rate types, exchange rates etc., and designing the best way to present the amounts to the users without affecting the performance. When consolidating the data for reporting in OBIA, we have designed the mechanisms in the Common Dimension, to allow users to report based on their required currencies. OBIA Facts store amounts in various currencies: Document Currency: This is the currency of the actual transaction. For a multinational company, this can be in various currencies. Local Currency: This is the base currency in which the accounting entries are recorded by the business. This is generally defined in the Ledger of the company. Global Currencies: OBIA provides five Global Currencies. Three are used across all modules. The last two are for CRM only. A Global currency is very useful when creating reports where the data is viewed enterprise-wide. Example; a US based multinational would want to see the reports in USD. The company will choose USD as one of the global currencies. OBIA allows users to define up-to five global currencies during the initial implementation. The term Currency Preference is used to designate the set of values: Document Currency, Local Currency, Global Currency 1, Global Currency 2, Global Currency 3; which are shared among all modules. There are four more currency preferences, specific to certain modules: Global Currency 4 (aka CRM Currency) and Global Currency 5 which are used in CRM; and Project Currency and Contract Currency, used in Project Analytics. When choosing Local Currency for Currency preference, the data will show in the currency of the Ledger (or Business Unit) in the prompt. So it is important to select one Ledger or Business Unit when viewing data in Local Currency. More on this can be found in the section: Toggling Currency Preferences in the Dashboard. Design Logic When extracting the fact data, the OOTB mappings extract and load the document amount, and the local amount in target tables. It also loads the exchange rates required to convert the document amount into the corresponding global amounts. If the source system only provides the document amount in the transaction, the extract mapping does a lookup to get the Local currency code, and the Local exchange rate. The Load mapping then uses the local currency code and rate to derive the local amount. The load mapping also fetches the Global Currencies and looks up the corresponding exchange rates. The lookup of exchange rates is done via the Exchange Rate Dimension provided as a Common/Conforming Dimension in OBIA. The Exchange Rate Dimension stores the exchange rates between various currencies for a date range and Rate Type. Two physical tables W_EXCH_RATE_G and W_GLOBAL_EXCH_RATE_G are used to provide the lookups and conversions between currencies. The data is loaded from the source system’s Ledger tables. W_EXCH_RATE_G stores the exchange rates between currencies with a date range. On the other hand, W_GLOBAL_EXCH_RATE_G stores the currency conversions between the document currency and the pre-defined five Global Currencies for each day. Based on the requirements, the fact mappings can decide and use one or both tables to do the conversion. Currency design in OBIA also taps into the MLS and Domain architecture, thus allowing the users to map the currencies to a universal Domain during the implementation time. This is especially important for companies deploying and using OBIA with multiple source adapters. Some Gotchas to Look for It is necessary to think through the currencies during the initial implementation. 1) Identify various types of currencies that are used by your business. Understand what will be your Local (or Base) and Documentation currency. Identify various global currencies that your users will want to look at the reports. This will be based on the global nature of your business. Changes to these currencies later in the project, while permitted, but may cause Full data loads and hence lost time. 2) If the user has a multi source system make sure that the Global Currencies and Global Rate Types chosen in Configuration Manager do have the corresponding source specific counterparts. In other words, make sure for every DW specific value chosen for Currency Code or Rate Type, there is a source Domain mapping already done. Technical Section This section will briefly mention the technical scenarios employed in the OBIA adaptors to extract data from each source system. In OBIA, we have two main tables which store the Currency Rate information as explained in previous sections. W_EXCH_RATE_G and W_GLOBAL_EXCH_RATE_G are the two tables. W_EXCH_RATE_G stores all the Currency Conversions present in the source system. It captures data for a Date Range. W_GLOBAL_EXCH_RATE_G has Global Currency Conversions stored at a Daily level. However the challenge here is to store all the 5 Global Currency Exchange Rates in a single record for each From Currency. Let’s voyage further into the Source System Extraction logic for each of these tables and understand the flow briefly. EBS: In EBS, we have Currency Data stored in GL_DAILY_RATES table. As the name indicates GL_DAILY_RATES EBS table has data at a daily level. However in our warehouse we store the data with a Date Range and insert a new range record only when the Exchange Rate changes for a particular From Currency, To Currency and Rate Type. Below are the main logical steps that we employ in this process. (Incremental Flow only) – Cleanup the data in W_EXCH_RATE_G. Delete the records which have Start Date > minimum conversion date Update the End Date of the existing records. Compress the daily data from GL_DAILY_RATES table into Range Records. Incremental map uses $$XRATE_UPD_NUM_DAY as an extra parameter. Generate Previous Rate, Previous Date and Next Date for each of the Daily record from the OLTP. Filter out the records which have Conversion Rate same as Previous Rates or if the Conversion Date lies within a single day range. Mark the records as ‘Keep’ and ‘Filter’ and also get the final End Date for the single Range record (Unique Combination of From Date, To Date, Rate and Conversion Date). Filter the records marked as ‘Filter’ in the INFA map. The above steps will load W_EXCH_RATE_GS. Step 0 updates/deletes W_EXCH_RATE_G directly. SIL map will then insert/update the GS data into W_EXCH_RATE_G. These steps convert the daily records in GL_DAILY_RATES to Range records in W_EXCH_RATE_G. We do not need such special logic for loading W_GLOBAL_EXCH_RATE_G. This is a table where we store data at a Daily Granular Level. However we need to pivot the data because the data present in multiple rows in source tables needs to be stored in different columns of the same row in DW. We use GROUP BY and CASE logic to achieve this. Fusion: Fusion has extraction logic very similar to EBS. The only difference is that the Cleanup logic that was mentioned in step 0 above does not use $$XRATE_UPD_NUM_DAY parameter. In Fusion we bring all the Exchange Rates in Incremental as well and do the cleanup. The SIL then takes care of Insert/Updates accordingly. PeopleSoft:PeopleSoft does not have From Date and To Date explicitly in the Source tables. Let’s look at an example. Please note that this is achieved from PS1 onwards only. 1 Jan 2010 – USD to INR – 45 31 Jan 2010 – USD to INR – 46 PSFT stores records in above fashion. This means that Exchange Rate of 45 for USD to INR is applicable for 1 Jan 2010 to 30 Jan 2010. We need to store data in this fashion in DW. Also PSFT has Exchange Rate stored as RATE_MULT and RATE_DIV. We need to do a RATE_MULT/RATE_DIV to get the correct Exchange Rate. We generate From Date and To Date while extracting data from source and this has certain assumptions: If a record gets updated/inserted in the source, it will be extracted in incremental. Also if this updated/inserted record is between other dates, then we also extract the preceding and succeeding records (based on dates) of this record. This is required because we need to generate a range record and we have 3 records whose ranges have changed. Taking the same example as above, if there is a new record which gets inserted on 15 Jan 2010; the new ranges are 1 Jan to 14 Jan, 15 Jan to 30 Jan and 31 Jan to Next available date. Even though 1 Jan record and 31 Jan have not changed, we will still extract them because the range is affected. Similar logic is used for Global Exchange Rate Extraction. We create the Range records and get it into a Temporary table. Then we join to Day Dimension, create individual records and pivot the data to get the 5 Global Exchange Rates for each From Currency, Date and Rate Type. Siebel: Siebel Facts are dependent on Global Exchange Rates heavily and almost none of them really use individual Exchange Rates. In other words, W_GLOBAL_EXCH_RATE_G is the main table used in Siebel from PS1 release onwards. As of January 2002, the Euro Triangulation method for converting between currencies belonging to EMU members is not needed for present and future currency exchanges. However, the method is still available in Siebel applications, as are the old currencies, so that historical data can be maintained accurately. The following description applies only to historical data needing conversion prior to the 2002 switch to the Euro for the EMU member countries. If a country is a member of the European Monetary Union (EMU), you should convert its currency to other currencies through the Euro. This is called triangulation, and it is used whenever either currency being converted has EMU Triangulation checked. Due to this, there are multiple extraction flows in SEBL ie. EUR to EMU, EUR to NonEMU, EUR to DMC and so on. We load W_EXCH_RATE_G through multiple flows with these data. This has been kept same as previous versions of OBIA. W_GLOBAL_EXCH_RATE_G being a new table does not have such needs. However SEBL does not have From Date and To Date columns in the Source tables similar to PSFT. We use similar extraction logic as explained in PSFT section for SEBL as well. What if all 5 Global Currencies configured are same? As mentioned in previous sections, from PS1 onwards we store Global Exchange Rates in W_GLOBAL_EXCH_RATE_G table. The extraction logic for this table involves Pivoting data from multiple rows into a single row with 5 Global Exchange Rates in 5 columns. As mentioned in previous sections, we use CASE and GROUP BY functions to achieve this. This approach poses a unique problem when all the 5 Global Currencies Chosen are same. For example – If the user configures all 5 Global Currencies as ‘USD’ then the extract logic will not be able to generate a record for From Currency=USD. This is because, not all Source Systems will have a USD->USD conversion record. We have _Generated mappings to take care of this case. We generate a record with Conversion Rate=1 for such cases. Reusable Lookups Before PS1, we had a Mapplet for Currency Conversions. In PS1, we only have reusable Lookups- LKP_W_EXCH_RATE_G and LKP_W_GLOBAL_EXCH_RATE_G. These lookups have another layer of logic so that all the lookup conditions are met when they are used in various Fact Mappings. Any user who would want to do a LKP on W_EXCH_RATE_G or W_GLOBAL_EXCH_RATE_G should and must use these Lookups. A direct join or Lookup on the tables might lead to wrong data being returned. Changing Currency preferences in the Dashboard: In the 796x series, all amount metrics in OBIA were showing the Global1 amount. The customer needed to change the metric definitions to show them in another Currency preference. Project Analytics started supporting currency preferences since 7.9.6 release though, and it published a Tech note for other module customers to add toggling between currency preferences to the solution. List of Currency Preferences Starting from 11.1.1.x release, the BI Platform added a new feature to support multiple currencies. The new session variable (PREFERRED_CURRENCY) is populated through a newly introduced currency prompt. This prompt can take its values from the xml file: userpref_currencies_OBIA.xml, which is hosted in the BI Server installation folder, under :< home>\instances\instance1\config\OracleBIPresentationServicesComponent\coreapplication_obips1\userpref_currencies.xml This file contains the list of currency preferences, like“Local Currency”, “Global Currency 1”,…which customers can also rename to give them more meaningful business names. There are two options for showing the list of currency preferences to the user in the dashboard: Static and Dynamic. In Static mode, all users will see the full list as in the user preference currencies file. In the Dynamic mode, the list shown in the currency prompt drop down is a result of a dynamic query specified in the same file. Customers can build some security into the rpd, so the list of currency preferences will be based on the user roles…BI Applications built a subject area: “Dynamic Currency Preference” to run this query, and give every user only the list of currency preferences required by his application roles. Adding Currency to an Amount Field When the user selects one of the items from the currency prompt, all the amounts in that page will show in the Currency corresponding to that preference. For example, if the user selects “Global Currency1” from the prompt, all data will be showing in Global Currency 1 as specified in the Configuration Manager. If the user select “Local Currency”, all amount fields will show in the Currency of the Business Unit selected in the BU filter of the same page. If there is no particular Business Unit selected in that filter, and the data selected by the query contains amounts in more than one currency (for example one BU has USD as a functional currency, the other has EUR as functional currency), then subtotals will not be available (cannot add USD and EUR amounts in one field), and depending on the set up (see next paragraph), the user may receive an error. There are two ways to add the Currency field to an amount metric: In the form of currency code, like USD, EUR…For this the user needs to add the field “Apps Common Currency Code” to the report. This field is in every subject area, usually under the table “Currency Tag” or “Currency Code”… In the form of currency symbol ($ for USD, € for EUR,…) For this, the user needs to format the amount metrics in the report as a currency column, by specifying the currency tag column in the Column Properties option in Column Actions drop down list. Typically this column should be the “BI Common Currency Code” available in every subject area. Select Column Properties option in the Edit list of a metric. In the Data Format tab, select Custom as Treat Number As. Enter the following syntax under Custom Number Format: [$:currencyTagColumn=Subjectarea.table.column] Where Column is the “BI Common Currency Code” defined to take the currency code value based on the currency preference chosen by the user in the Currency preference prompt.

    Read the article

  • DualLayout for SharePoint 2010 WCM Quick Start

    - by svdoever
    DualLayout for SharePoint 2010 WCM is a solution to provide you with complete HTML freedom in your SharePoint Server 2010 publishing pages. In this post I provide a quick start guide to get you up and running quickly so you can try it out for yourself. This quick start creates a simple HTML5 site with a page to show-case the basics and the power of DualLayout. We will create the site in its own web application. Normally there are many things you have to do to create a clean start point for your SharePoint 2010 WCM site. All those steps will be provided in later posts. For now we want to give you the minimal set of steps to take to get DualLayout working on your machine. Create an authenticated web application with hostheader cms.html5demo.local on port 80 for the cms side of the site. Click the Create Site Collection link on the Application Created dialog box and create a Site Collection based on the Publishing Portal site template. Before we can click the site link in the Top-Level Site Successfully Created dialog we need to add the new host header cms.html5demo.local to the hosts file. Add the following line to the hosts file: 127.0.0.1        cms.html5demo.local Navigate to the site at http://cms.html5demo.local to see the out-of-the-box example Adventure Works publishing site. Download and add the DualLayout solution package designfactory.duallayout.sps2010.trial.1.2.0.0.wsp to the farm’s solution store: On the Start menu, click All Programs. Click Microsoft SharePoint 2010 Products. Click SharePoint 2010 Management Shell. At the Windows PowerShell command prompt, type the following command:Add-SPSolution -LiteralPath designfactory.duallayout.sps2010.trial.1.2.0.0.wsp In SharePoint 2010 Central Administration deploy the solution to the web application http://cms.html5demo.local. Navigate to the site at http://cms.html5demo.local, and in the Site Settings screen select Site Collection Administration > Site collection features and activate the following feature: Open the site http://cms.html5demo.local in SharePoint Designer 2010. Create a view-mode masterpage html5simple.master with the following code: html5simple.master <%@ Master language="C#" %> <%@ Register Tagprefix="SharePointWebControls" Namespace="Microsoft.SharePoint.WebControls" Assembly="Microsoft.SharePoint, Version=14.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=71e9bce111e9429c" %> <%@ Register TagPrefix="sdl" Namespace="DesignFactory.DualLayout" Assembly="DesignFactory.DualLayout, Version=1.2.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=077f92bbf864a536" %>   <!DOCTYPE html> <html class="no-js">       <head>         <meta charset="utf-8" />         <meta http-equiv="X-UA-Compatible" content="IE=Edge" />         <title><SharePointWebControls:FieldValue FieldName="Title" runat="server"/></title>           <script type="text/javascript">             document.createElement('header');             document.createElement('nav');             document.createElement('article');             document.createElement('hgroup');             document.createElement('aside');             document.createElement('section');             document.createElement('footer');             document.createElement('figure');             document.createElement('time');         </script>           <asp:ContentPlaceHolder id="PlaceHolderAdditionalPageHead" runat="server"/>     </head>          <body>                  <header>             <div class="logo">Logo</div>             <h1>SiteTitle</h1>             <nav>                 <a href="#">SiteMenu 1</a>                 <a href="#">SiteMenu 2</a>                 <a href="#">SiteMenu 3</a>                 <a href="#">SiteMenu 4</a>                 <a href="#">SiteMenu 5</a>                 <sdl:SwitchToWcmModeLinkButton runat="server" Text="…"/>             </nav>             <div class="tagline">Tagline</div>             <form>                 <label>Zoek</label>                 <input type="text" placeholder="Voer een zoekterm in...">                 <button>Zoek</button>                             </form>           </header>                  <div class="content">             <div class="pageContent">                 <asp:ContentPlaceHolder id="PlaceHolderMain" runat="server" />             </div>         </div>              <footer>             <nav>                 <ul>                     <li><a href="#">FooterMenu 1</a></li>                     <li><a href="#">FooterMenu 2</a></li>                     <li><a href="#">FooterMenu 3</a></li>                     <li><a href="#">FooterMenu 4</a></li>                     <li><a href="#">FooterMenu 5</a></li>                 </ul>             </nav>             <small>Copyright &copy; 2011 Macaw</small>         </footer>     </body> </html> Note that if no specific WCM-mode master page is specified (html5simple-wcm.master), the default v4.master master page will be used in WCM-mode. Create a WCM-mode page layout html5simplePage-wcm.aspx with the following code: html5simplePage-wcm.aspx <%@ Page language="C#"     Inherits="DesignFactory.DualLayout.WcmModeLayoutPage, DesignFactory.DualLayout, Version=1.2.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=077f92bbf864a536" %> <%@ Register Tagprefix="SharePointWebControls"              Namespace="Microsoft.SharePoint.WebControls"              Assembly="Microsoft.SharePoint, Version=14.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=71e9bce111e9429c" %> <%@ Register Tagprefix="WebPartPages"              Namespace="Microsoft.SharePoint.WebPartPages"              Assembly="Microsoft.SharePoint, Version=14.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=71e9bce111e9429c" %> <%@ Register Tagprefix="PublishingWebControls"              Namespace="Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing.WebControls"              Assembly="Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing, Version=14.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=71e9bce111e9429c" %> <%@ Register Tagprefix="PublishingNavigation" Namespace="Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing.Navigation"              Assembly="Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing, Version=14.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=71e9bce111e9429c" %> <asp:Content ContentPlaceholderID="PlaceHolderPageTitle" runat="server">     <SharePointWebControls:FieldValue id="PageTitle" FieldName="Title" runat="server"/> </asp:Content> <asp:Content ContentPlaceholderID="PlaceHolderMain" runat="server"> </asp:Content> Notice the Inherits at line two. Instead of inheriting from Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing.PublishingLayoutPage we need to inherit from DesignFactory.DualLayout.WcmModeLayoutPage. Create a view-mode page layout html5simplePage.aspx with the following code: html5simplePage.aspx html5simplePage.aspx <%@ Page language="C#"          Inherits="DesignFactory.DualLayout.ViewModeLayoutPage, DesignFactory.DualLayout,                     Version=1.2.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=077f92bbf864a536" %> <%@ Register Tagprefix="SharePointWebControls"              Namespace="Microsoft.SharePoint.WebControls"              Assembly="Microsoft.SharePoint, Version=14.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=71e9bce111e9429c" %> <%@ Register Tagprefix="WebPartPages"              Namespace="Microsoft.SharePoint.WebPartPages"              Assembly="Microsoft.SharePoint, Version=14.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=71e9bce111e9429c" %> <%@ Register Tagprefix="PublishingWebControls"              Namespace="Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing.WebControls"              Assembly="Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing, Version=14.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=71e9bce111e9429c" %> <%@ Register Tagprefix="PublishingNavigation" Namespace="Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing.Navigation"              Assembly="Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing, Version=14.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=71e9bce111e9429c" %> <asp:Content ContentPlaceholderID="PlaceHolderAdditionalPageHead" runat="server" /> <asp:Content ContentPlaceholderID="PlaceHolderMain" runat="server">     The title of the page is: <SharePointWebControls:FieldValue id="PageTitleInContent" FieldName="Title" runat="server"/> </asp:Content> Notice the Inherits at line two. Instead of inheriting from Microsoft.SharePoint.Publishing.PublishingLayoutPage we need to inherit from DesignFactory.DualLayout.ViewModeLayoutPage. Set the html5simple.master master page as the Site Master Page Set the allowed page layouts to the Html5 Simple Page page layout and set the New Page Default Settings also to Html5 Simple Page so new created pages are also of this page layout. Note that the Html5 Simple Page page layout is initially not selectable for New Page Default Settings. Save this configuration page first after selecting the allowed page layouts, then open again and select the default new page. Under Site Actions select the New Page action. Create a page Home.aspx of the default page layout type Html5 Simple Page. Set the new created Home.aspx page as Welcome Page. Navigate to the site http://csm.html5demo.local and see the home page in the WCM display and edit mode. Select Switch to View Mode under Site Actions to see the resulting page in view-mode. Select the three dots (…) at the right side of the menu to switch back to WCM-mode. Have a look at the source view of the resulting web page and admire the clean HTML. No SharePoint specific markup or CSS files! Clean HTML in page <!DOCTYPE html> <html class="no-js">     <head>         <meta charset="utf-8" />         <meta http-equiv="X-UA-Compatible" content="IE=Edge" />         <title>Home</title>         <script type="text/javascript">             document.createElement('header');             document.createElement('nav');             document.createElement('article');             document.createElement('hgroup');             document.createElement('aside');             document.createElement('section');             document.createElement('footer');             document.createElement('figure');             document.createElement('time');         </script>              </head>          <body>                  <header>             <div class="logo">Logo</div>             <h1>SiteTitle</h1>             <nav>                 <a href="#">SiteMenu 1</a>                 <a href="#">SiteMenu 2</a>                 <a href="#">SiteMenu 3</a>                 <a href="#">SiteMenu 4</a>                 <a href="#">SiteMenu 5</a>                 <a href="/Pages/Home.aspx?DualLayout_ShowInWcmMode=true">…</a>             </nav>             <div class="tagline">Tagline</div>             <form>                 <label>Zoek</label>                 <input type="text" placeholder="Voer een zoekterm in...">                 <button>Zoek</button>                             </form>         </header>                  <div class="content">             <div class="pageContent">                      The title of the page is: Home             </div>         </div>              <footer>             <nav>                 <ul>                     <li><a href="#">FooterMenu 1</a></li>                     <li><a href="#">FooterMenu 2</a></li>                     <li><a href="#">FooterMenu 3</a></li>                     <li><a href="#">FooterMenu 4</a></li>                     <li><a href="#">FooterMenu 5</a></li>                 </ul>             </nav>             <small>Copyright &copy; 2011 Macaw</small>         </footer>     </body> </html> <!-- Macaw DesignFactory DualLayout for SharePoint 2010 Trial version --> Note the link at line 37, this link will only be rendered for authenticated users and is our way to switch back to WCM-mode. This concludes our quick start to get DualLayout up an running in a matter of minutes. And what is the result: You can have the full SharePoint 2010 WCM publishing page editing experience to manage the content in your pages. You don’t have to delve into large SharePoint specific master pages and page layouts with a lot of knowledge of the does and don'ts with respect to SharePoint controls, scripts and stylesheets. The end-user gets a clean and light HTML page. Get your fully functional, non-timebombed trial copy of DualLayout and start creating!

    Read the article

  • CodePlex Daily Summary for Tuesday, June 28, 2011

    CodePlex Daily Summary for Tuesday, June 28, 2011Popular ReleasesCoding4Fun Tools: Coding4Fun.Phone.Toolkit v1.4.3: Fix for prompts not returning the appbarMosaic Project: Mosaic Alpha build 261: - Fixed crash when pinning applications in x64 OS - Added Hub to video widget. It shows videos from Video library (only .wmv and .avi). Can work slow if there are too much files. - Fixed some issues with scrolling - Fixed bug with html widgets - Fixed bug in Gmail widget - Added html today widget missed in previous release - Now Mosaic saves running widgets if you restarting from optionsEnhSim: EnhSim 2.4.9 BETA: 2.4.9 BETAThis release supports WoW patch 4.2 at level 85 To use this release, you must have the Microsoft Visual C++ 2010 Redistributable Package installed. This can be downloaded from http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/details.aspx?FamilyID=A7B7A05E-6DE6-4D3A-A423-37BF0912DB84 To use the GUI you must have the .NET 4.0 Framework installed. This can be downloaded from http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/details.aspx?FamilyID=9cfb2d51-5ff4-4491-b0e5-b386f32c0992 - Added in some of th....NET Reflector Add-Ins: Reflector V7 Add-Ins: All the add-ins compiled for Reflector V7TerrariViewer: TerrariViewer v4.1 [4.0 Bug Fixes]: Version 4.1 ChangelogChanged how users will Open Player files (This change makes it much easier) This allowed me to remove the "Current player file" labels that were present Changed file control icons Added submit bug button Various Bug Fixes Fixed crashes related to clicking on buffs before a character is loaded Fixed crashes related to selecting "No Buff" when choosing a new buff Fixed crashes related to clicking on a "Max" button on the buff tab before a character is loaded Cor...AcDown????? - Anime&Comic Downloader: AcDown????? v3.0 Beta8: ??AcDown???????????????,?????????????????????。????????????????????,??Acfun、Bilibili、???、???、?????,???????????、???????。 AcDown???????????????????????????,???,???????????????????。 AcDown???????C#??,?????"Acfun?????"。 ????32??64? Windows XP/Vista/7 ????????????? ??:????????Windows XP???,?????????.NET Framework 2.0???(x86)?.NET Framework 2.0???(x64),?????"?????????"??? ??????????????,??????????: ??"AcDown?????"????????? ??v3.0 Beta8 ?? ??????????????? ???????????????(??????????) ???????...BlogEngine.NET: BlogEngine.NET 2.5: Get DotNetBlogEngine for 3 Months Free! Click Here for More Info 3 Months FREE – BlogEngine.NET Hosting – Click Here! If you want to set up and start using BlogEngine.NET right away, you should download the Web project. If you want to extend or modify BlogEngine.NET, you should download the source code. If you are upgrading from a previous version of BlogEngine.NET, please take a look at the Upgrading to BlogEngine.NET 2.5 instructions. To get started, be sure to check out our installatio...PHP Manager for IIS: PHP Manager 1.2 for IIS 7: This release contains all the functionality available in 62183 plus the following additions: Command Line Support via PowerShell - now it is possible to manage and script PHP installations on IIS by using Windows PowerShell. More information is available at Managing PHP installations with PHP Manager command line. Detection and alert when using local PHP handler - if a web site or a directory has a local copy of PHP handler mapping then the configuration changes made on upper configuration ...MiniTwitter: 1.71: MiniTwitter 1.71 ???? ?? OAuth ???????????? ????????、??????????????????? ???????????????????????SizeOnDisk: 1.0.10.0: Fix: issue 327: size format error when save settings Fix: some UI bindings trouble (sorting, refresh) Fix: user settings file deletion when corrupted Feature: TreeView virtualization (better speed with many folders) Feature: New file type DataGrid column Feature: In KByte view, show size of file < 1024B and > 0 with 3 decimal Feature: New language: Italian Task: Cleanup for speedRawr: Rawr 4.2.0: This is the Downloadable WPF version of Rawr!For web-based version see http://elitistjerks.com/rawr.php You can find the version notes at: http://rawr.codeplex.com/wikipage?title=VersionNotes Rawr AddonWe now have a Rawr Official Addon for in-game exporting and importing of character data hosted on Curse. The Addon does not perform calculations like Rawr, it simply shows your exported Rawr data in wow tooltips and lets you export your character to Rawr (including bag and bank items) like Char...HD-Trailers.NET Downloader: HD-Trailer.net Downloader 1.86: This version implements a new config flag "ConsiderTheatricalandNumberedTrailersasIdentical" that for the purposes of Exclusions only Teaser Trailer and one Trailer (named Trailer, Theatrical Traler Trailer No. 1, Trailer 1, Trailer No. 2, etc) will be downloaded. This also includes a bug fix where the .nfo file did not include the -trailer if configured for XBMC.N2 CMS: 2.2: * Web platform installer support available ** Nuget support available What's newDinamico Templates (beta) - an MVC3 & Razor based template pack using the template-first! development paradigm Boilerplate CSS & HTML5 Advanced theming with css comipilation (concrete, dark, roadwork, terracotta) Template-first! development style Content, news, listing, slider, image sizes, search, sitemap, globalization, youtube, google map Display Tokens - replaces text tokens with rendered content (usag...Circuit Diagram: Circuit Diagram v0.5 Beta: New in this release: New components: Ammeter (meter) Voltmeter (meter) Undo/redo functionality for placing/moving components Choose resolution when exporting PNG image New logoMicrosoft Ajax Minifier: Microsoft Ajax Minifier 4.23: XML input file can now specify both JS and CSS output files in the same XML file. Don't output octal escsape sequences in string literals for strict-mode scripts. Expand expression optimizations to handle more instances of logical-not being smaller. Properly handle comments that look like conditional comments but aren't because no @cc_on statement has been encountered. CSS Important comments should start on a new line, and CSS hacks should not have the ! in them. Various other smaller updates.KinectNUI: Jun 25 Alpha Release: Initial public version. No installer needed, just run the EXE.Terraria World Viewer: Version 1.5: Update June 24th Made compatible with the new tiles found in Terraria 1.0.5Kinect Earth Move: KinectEarthMove sample code: Sample code releasedThis is a sample code for Kinect for Windows SDK beta, which was demonstrated on Channel 9 Kinect for Windows SKD beta launch event on June 17 2011. Using color image and skeleton data from Kinect and user in front of Kinect can manipulate the earth between his/her hands.patterns & practices: Project Silk: Project Silk Community Drop 12 - June 22, 2011: Changes from previous drop: Minor code changes. New "Introduction" chapter. New "Modularity" chapter. Updated "Architecture" chapter. Updated "Server-Side Implementation" chapter. Updated "Client Data Management and Caching" chapter. Guidance Chapters Ready for Review The Word documents for the chapters are included with the source code in addition to the CHM to help you provide feedback. The PDF is provided as a separate download for your convenience. Installation Overview To ins...DotNetNuke® Community Edition: 06.00.00 Beta: Beta 1 (Build 2300) includes many important enhancements to the user experience. The control panel has been updated for easier access to the most important features and additional forms have been adapted to the new pattern. This release also includes many bug fixes that make it more stable than previous CTP releases. Beta ForumsNew ProjectsAI4CAD-3D: AI4CAD-3D bir 3 boyutlu tasarim ve ince ve kaba insaat metraj programidir.Beginner 2D game Dev -MokoNa: learning to make 2D games from ground up cae2rampage: A top down XNA-based multipalyer game.CamelWiki: Simple wiki software written in Perl using POD as markup language. CamelWiki can use MySQL, PostgreSQL or SQLite as database backend. DmPoster: An assistant to help us to post danmaku to bilibili.tv website. ????? bilibili.tv ?????????。 It's developed in C#. ????? C#。EasyDP: EasyDP is an open source Silverlight application to upload and manage one's display pictures in a website. It can be integrated to websites not limited to ASP.NET. It posts images up with generic HTTP form data thus it can communicate with HTTP handler written in any server-side programming language.E-Commerce TCP: Projeto E-Commerce para a cadeira de TCP da UFRGS. Semestre 01/2011.Encounter: a host-guest interaction energy calculator: Encounter is a simple program for calculating the interaction energy between two molecules using the output from a GAUSSIAN two-component counterpoise correction calculation. The Counterpoise Correction arises due to the Basis Set Superposition Error in quantum modeling.Excel add-in for regular expressions: Match, replace, and search character strings in Excel using the C++0x <regex> library.FlvBugger: ?Flv????????,???????????????????,????????。Frontdesk: Frontdesk is a form creator and autoresponder program designed in Microsoft ASP.NET MVC 2. It contains a custom member/security implementation, admin area, and lots of flexibility in form & autoresponder creation. It uses an integrated WYSIWYG editor & form field drag-and-drop.His2012: his2012ixbShop: ???????? Open-source e-commerce platformJBot: PL: Program sieciowy JBot jest chatterbotem. EN: Network program JBot is chatterbot.JungleSoft_Lux: luxKillstone PaRSS: Killstone PaRSS is a jQuery Plugin that parses an RSS feed and appends the items from the feed to a UL or OL on your webpage.Killstone PHP Framework: A simple PHP framework that helps organize your PHP application in a Model / View / Controller pattern.Orchard-PhotoTag-FamilyTree: This is an Orchard Module that allows you to tag a photo. It comes with a widget and a Page type. In addition to tagging photo's you can create a family tree/org chart to drill down into. (I originally built this for a family reunion).ResX DSL: ResX DSL is a Domain Specific Language created with Visual Studio DSL Tools. It helps to define a ResX DSL-Model with multi-language and multi-typed Ressources and generates with T4-Templates an ordinary Resx-File as well as a Proxy-Class with a given Ressources-Set.Self-Tracking Entity Generator for WPF and Silverlight: An Entity Framework project item to generate self-tracking entity classes for WPF and Silverlight applications.SharePoint 2010 Print List Ribbon Button: SharePoint 2010 Print List button on Top Ribbon for Calendar listStocks Application: This is technical demo to apply F-Sharp (F#) language in real world application. This application is close to real world enterprise application (with very optimal solutions, at least in 2011). The function of this application is to get Stock Quote Data and Historical Stock Prices from Yahoo Finance The Smart Shopping List: The Smart Shopping List makes it easier to keep track of your purchasesUmbraco Flickr API Search - XSLT Extension: An Umbraco XSLT Extension Package that enables calling the Flickr API to retrieve photos from a tag(s), user, group, and text search. The underlying engine is built off of the FlickrNET library (http://www.codeplex.com/FlickrNet).WASTLib: WASTLib is the acronim of Web Application Security Testing Library. Its main purpose is to easly create security tests for your web application. WinPanel: WinPanel ist ein nachgemachtes GNOME-Panel, dass auf Windows läuft. Es wird in Visual Basic 2010 Express programmiert.

    Read the article

  • CodePlex Daily Summary for Sunday, February 13, 2011

    CodePlex Daily Summary for Sunday, February 13, 2011Popular ReleasesTV4Home - The all-in-one TV solution!: 0.1.0.0 Preview: This is the beta preview release of the TV4Home software.Finestra Virtual Desktops: 1.2: Fixes a few minor issues with 1.1 including the broken per-desktop backgrounds Further improves the speed of switching desktops A few UI performance improvements Added donations linksNuGet: NuGet 1.1: NuGet is a free, open source developer focused package management system for the .NET platform intent on simplifying the process of incorporating third party libraries into a .NET application during development. This release is a Visual Studio 2010 extension and contains the the Package Manager Console and the Add Package Dialog. The URL to the package OData feed is: http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=206669 To see the list of issues fixed in this release, visit this our issues listEnhSim: EnhSim 2.4.0: 2.4.0This release supports WoW patch 4.06 at level 85 To use this release, you must have the Microsoft Visual C++ 2010 Redistributable Package installed. This can be downloaded from http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/details.aspx?FamilyID=A7B7A05E-6DE6-4D3A-A423-37BF0912DB84 To use the GUI you must have the .NET 4.0 Framework installed. This can be downloaded from http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/details.aspx?FamilyID=9cfb2d51-5ff4-4491-b0e5-b386f32c0992 Changes since 2.3.0 - Upd...Sterling Isolated Storage Database with LINQ for Silverlight and Windows Phone 7: Sterling OODB v1.0: Note: use this changeset to download the source example that has been extended to show database generation, backup, and restore in the desktop example. Welcome to the Sterling 1.0 RTM. This version is not backwards-compatible with previous versions of Sterling. Sterling is also available via NuGet. This product has been used and tested in many applications and contains a full suite of unit tests. You can refer to the User's Guide for complete documentation, and use the unit tests as guide...PDF Rider: PDF Rider 0.5.1: Changes from the previous version * Use dynamic layout to better fit text in other languages * Includes French and Spanish localizations Prerequisites * Microsoft Windows Operating Systems (XP - Vista - 7) * Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 runtime * A PDF rendering software (i.e. Adobe Reader) that can be opened inside Internet Explorer. Installation instructionsChoose one of the following methods: 1. Download and run the "pdfRider0.5.1-setup.exe" (reccomended) 2. Down...Snoop, the WPF Spy Utility: Snoop 2.6.1: This release is a bug fixing release. Most importantly, issues have been seen around WPF 4.0 applications not always showing up in the app chooser. Hopefully, they are fixed now. I thought this issue warranted a minor release since more and more people are going WPF 4.0 and I don't want anyone to have any problems. Dan Hanan also contributes again with several usability features. Thanks Dan! Happy Snooping! p.s. By request, I am also attaching a .zip file ... so that people can install it ...RIBA - Rich Internet Business Application for Silverlight: Preview of MVVM Framework Source + Tutorials: This is a first public release of the MVVM Framework which is part of the final RIBA application. The complete RIBA example LOB application has yet to be published. Further Documentation on the MVVM part can be found on the Blog, http://www.SilverlightBlog.Net and in the downloadable source ( mvvm/doc/ ). Please post all issues and suggestions in the issue tracker.SharePoint Learning Kit: 1.5: SharePoint Learning Kit 1.5 has the following new functionality: *Support for SharePoint 2010 *E-Learning Actions can be localised *Two New Document Library Edit Options *Automatically add the Assignment List Web Part to the Web Part Gallery *Various Bug Fixes for the Drop Box There are 2 downloads for this release SLK-1.5-2010.zip for SharePoint 2010 SLK-1.5-2007.zip for SharePoint 2007 (WSS3 & MOSS 2007)Facebook C# SDK: 5.0.3 (BETA): This is fourth BETA release of the version 5 branch of the Facebook C# SDK. Remember this is a BETA build. Some things may change or not work exactly as planned. We are absolutely looking for feedback on this release to help us improve the final 5.X.X release. For more information about this release see the following blog posts: Facebook C# SDK - Writing your first Facebook Application Facebook C# SDK v5 Beta Internals Facebook C# SDK V5.0.0 (BETA) Released We have spend time trying ...NodeXL: Network Overview, Discovery and Exploration for Excel: NodeXL Excel Template, version 1.0.1.161: The NodeXL Excel template displays a network graph using edge and vertex lists stored in an Excel 2007 or Excel 2010 workbook. What's NewThis release adds a new Twitter List network importer, makes some minor feature improvements, and fixes a few bugs. See the Complete NodeXL Release History for details. Installation StepsFollow these steps to install and use the template: Download the Zip file. Unzip it into any folder. Use WinZip or a similar program, or just right-click the Zip file...WCF Data Services Toolkit: WCF Data Services Toolkit: The source code and binary releases of the WCF Data Services Toolkit. For simplicity, the source code download doesn't include any of the MSTest files. If you want those, you can pull the code down via MercurialyoutubeFisher: youtubeFisher 3.0 [beta]: What's new: Video capturing improved Supports YouTube's new layout (january 2011) Internal refactoringNearforums - ASP.NET MVC forum engine: Nearforums v5.0: Version 5.0 of the ASP.NET MVC Forum Engine, containing the following improvements: .NET 4.0 as target framework using ASP.NET MVC 3. All views migrated to Razor for cleaner markup. Alternate template (Layout file) for mobile devices 4 Bug Fixes since Version 4.1 Visit the project Roadmap for more details. Webdeploy package sha1 checksum: 28785b7248052465ea0738a7775e8e8744d84c27fuv: 1.0 release, codename Chopper Joe: features: search/replace :o to open file :s to save file :q to quitASP.NET MVC Project Awesome, jQuery Ajax helpers (controls): 1.7: A rich set of helpers (controls) that you can use to build highly responsive and interactive Ajax-enabled Web applications. These helpers include Autocomplete, AjaxDropdown, Lookup, Confirm Dialog, Popup Form, Popup and Pager html generation optimized new features for the lookup (add additional search data ) live demo went aeroAutoLoL: AutoLoL v1.5.5: AutoChat now allows up to 6 items. Items with nr. 7-0 will be removed! News page url's are now opened in the default browser Added a context menu to the system tray icon (thanks to Alex Banagos) AutoChat now allows configuring the Chat Keys and the Modifier Key The recent files list now supports compact and full mode Fix: Swapped mouse buttons are now properly detected Fix: Sometimes the Play button was pressed while still greyed out Champion: Karma Note: You can also run the u...mojoPortal: 2.3.6.2: see release notes on mojoportal.com http://www.mojoportal.com/mojoportal-2362-released.aspx Note that we have separate deployment packages for .NET 3.5 and .NET 4.0 The deployment package downloads on this page are pre-compiled and ready for production deployment, they contain no C# source code. To download the source code see the Source Code Tab I recommend getting the latest source code using TortoiseHG, you can get the source code corresponding to this release here.Rawr: Rawr 4.0.19 Beta: Rawr is now web-based. The link to use Rawr4 is: http://elitistjerks.com/rawr.phpThis is the Cataclysm Beta Release. More details can be found at the following link http://rawr.codeplex.com/Thread/View.aspx?ThreadId=237262 As of the 4.0.16 release, you can now also begin using the new Downloadable WPF version of Rawr!This is a pre-alpha release of the WPF version, there are likely to be a lot of issues. If you have a problem, please follow the Posting Guidelines and put it into the Issue Trac...IronRuby: 1.1.2: IronRuby 1.1.2 is a servicing release that keeps on improving compatibility with Ruby 1.9.2 and includes IronRuby integration to Visual Studio 2010. We decided to drop 1.8.6 compatibility mode in all post-1.0 releases. We recommend using IronRuby 1.0 if you need 1.8.6 compatibility. In this release we fixed several major issues: - problems that blocked Gem installation in certain cases - regex syntax: the parser was replaced with a new one that is much more compatible with Ruby 1.9.2 - cras...New ProjectsAbstract | .NET DDD abstraction for infra-structure (Data, Blobs, Queues): In the last few years we have seen many tools abstract access to infra-structures. They are all very different - what makes it difficult for you to move from Azure or to Azure. Abstract makes migration easier by standardising access to these infra-structures.Apex APRS: Apex APRS is a new APRS client application that is unlike any other. Key Features: Online and offline-cached map viewing from multiple popular sources Fast, simple, intuitive & powerful user interface Customizable Notification System: Customizable Notification SystemDaniel Singleton for C++: An elegant solution for C++ singletons using dependency declaration to control lifetime. One object created during any execution, lazy-init, thread safety... nice and compact.Deduplicator: Deduplicator helps to organize your file system. Create one folder organized by choice containing unique files. To be used for photo's, mp3's or any other binary format. Deduplicator is released yet, user interface is limited and some hardcoding is still in placeDigitypon (ASP.NET MVC 3): Digitypon will be a new web application specialized to be used by those who want to set an e-newspaper or an e-magazine. The main difference among other CMSs is that Digitypon’s workflow is a virtualized way of how employees of printed matters (newspaperes, magazinews) work.EdgeJournalImporter: Import journal files written on the Entourage (Pocket) Edge into Microsoft OneNote 2007+FlatFileSerializer: Serialize and deserialize flat file records from and to self defined classes using Attributes.Google Chart Helper: Controls to insert Google Charts to your web application. No Javascript code to do. We do it for you !How to display records from MySQL 5.1 database in asp.net using VB.net or CSharp: How to display records from MySQl 5.1+ database in asp.net with vb.net or C# code.HTTP Filer: HTTP Filer is a utility that allow users to share files and documents over http protocol. This utility was designed especially for Windows Phone users to send files from computer to their phone easily without send emails with attachments or upload files to an internet server.ibamonitoring: Source code for the avian point-count data collection web site www.ibamonitoring.org.JoPack Ultra Light Packaging for large teams: JoPack is an opensource ultra light package management software – that is targeted for simplifying development with large teams sharing volatile assemblies across several solutions. Latest project source code can be found on project home site: http://code.google.com/p/jo-pack/ L-System Turtle Based Fractal Tool (L-Fractal Tool): A tool to help you play with L-System turtle graphic based fractal curves( http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/L-system) This tool helps you look into some of the well known curves & lets you define new patterns & production rules to build your own. Have a fun-fractal day !mailer: mailer is a application to mail. It's developed in Python.NJamb: A C# DSL for more rigorous tests: NJamb is a C# syntax for tests and DDD specifications. It makes them more readable, faster to write, and more rigorous. Its Linq-style expressions can assert preconditions and postconditions. IntelliSense makes the syntax almost foolproof. And, it's designed to be extended.NUpdater: NUpdater makes it easier for .NET Framework developers to add auto-updating capability to their software. Putting together numerous patching capabilities, this library is an all-around updater. Developed in C# with CLS compliance (this library is fully compatible with Mono).Perihelia - The .NET & Silverlight Socket Project: Perihelia is an open-source socket framework. The framework includes (or will include) all the necessities you need to satisfy your networking needs. Windows and WPF applications are currently supported, and Silverlight applications will be supported soon.PLogger: PLogger is a light, fast configuration-less file appender logger build using a parallel pipeline architecture. It is much easier and faster to set up and use then Log4Net or the enterprise libraryQuasar: Quasar is a professional .Net utility library which adds sugar on .net framework.Sectors Game Engine: Sectors is a XNA-based 2.5D (Doom-like) game engine with console and scripting support for Windows.SharePoint 2010 Server-Side-Scanner WebPart - embDocumentInhalator: embDocumentInhalator makes it possible for SharePoint 2010 users to scan documents from scanners attached directly to the server. For developers it may help to see the relationship between the individual components required. SIAJUR: Projeto Web para controle de documentossvcutil2: svcutil2 generates Wcf client proxies from Wsdl2 documents.TemporalMemoryNetwork: TemporalMemoryNetwork is a research project exploring how dynamical systems can store and represent patterns that occur through time.WebDAV#: This project aims to implement WebDAV support for .NET, both for client software as well as software hosting their own WebDAV server. The project will start with the server portion. The project will be developed in C# 3.5 for .NET 3.5 and 4.0.

    Read the article

  • Unable to connect to Samba printer

    - by user127236
    I have a headless Ubuntu 12.04 server for files and printers. It shares files via Samba just fine. However, the HP PSC-750xi connected to the server via USB is not accessible from my Ubuntu 12.04 laptop. I can browse for it in the Printing control panel, but any attempt to authenticate my ID to the printer with my user credentials results in the error "This print share is not accessible". I have included the Samba smb.conf file below. Any help appreciated. Thanks... JGB # # Sample configuration file for the Samba suite for Debian GNU/Linux. # # # This is the main Samba configuration file. You should read the # smb.conf(5) manual page in order to understand the options listed # here. Samba has a huge number of configurable options most of which # are not shown in this example # # Some options that are often worth tuning have been included as # commented-out examples in this file. # - When such options are commented with ";", the proposed setting # differs from the default Samba behaviour # - When commented with "#", the proposed setting is the default # behaviour of Samba but the option is considered important # enough to be mentioned here # # NOTE: Whenever you modify this file you should run the command # "testparm" to check that you have not made any basic syntactic # errors. # A well-established practice is to name the original file # "smb.conf.master" and create the "real" config file with # testparm -s smb.conf.master >smb.conf # This minimizes the size of the really used smb.conf file # which, according to the Samba Team, impacts performance # However, use this with caution if your smb.conf file contains nested # "include" statements. See Debian bug #483187 for a case # where using a master file is not a good idea. # #======================= Global Settings ======================= [global] log file = /var/log/samba/log.%m passwd chat = *Enter\snew\s*\spassword:* %n\n *Retype\snew\s*\spassword:* %n\n *password\supdated\ssuccessfully* . obey pam restrictions = yes map to guest = bad user encrypt passwords = true passwd program = /usr/bin/passwd %u passdb backend = tdbsam dns proxy = no writeable = yes server string = %h server (Samba, Ubuntu) unix password sync = yes workgroup = WORKGROUP syslog = 0 panic action = /usr/share/samba/panic-action %d usershare allow guests = yes max log size = 1000 pam password change = yes ## Browsing/Identification ### # Change this to the workgroup/NT-domain name your Samba server will part of # server string is the equivalent of the NT Description field # Windows Internet Name Serving Support Section: # WINS Support - Tells the NMBD component of Samba to enable its WINS Server # wins support = no # WINS Server - Tells the NMBD components of Samba to be a WINS Client # Note: Samba can be either a WINS Server, or a WINS Client, but NOT both ; wins server = w.x.y.z # This will prevent nmbd to search for NetBIOS names through DNS. # What naming service and in what order should we use to resolve host names # to IP addresses ; name resolve order = lmhosts host wins bcast #### Networking #### # The specific set of interfaces / networks to bind to # This can be either the interface name or an IP address/netmask; # interface names are normally preferred ; interfaces = 127.0.0.0/8 eth0 # Only bind to the named interfaces and/or networks; you must use the # 'interfaces' option above to use this. # It is recommended that you enable this feature if your Samba machine is # not protected by a firewall or is a firewall itself. However, this # option cannot handle dynamic or non-broadcast interfaces correctly. ; bind interfaces only = yes #### Debugging/Accounting #### # This tells Samba to use a separate log file for each machine # that connects # Cap the size of the individual log files (in KiB). # If you want Samba to only log through syslog then set the following # parameter to 'yes'. # syslog only = no # We want Samba to log a minimum amount of information to syslog. Everything # should go to /var/log/samba/log.{smbd,nmbd} instead. If you want to log # through syslog you should set the following parameter to something higher. # Do something sensible when Samba crashes: mail the admin a backtrace ####### Authentication ####### # "security = user" is always a good idea. This will require a Unix account # in this server for every user accessing the server. See # /usr/share/doc/samba-doc/htmldocs/Samba3-HOWTO/ServerType.html # in the samba-doc package for details. # security = user # You may wish to use password encryption. See the section on # 'encrypt passwords' in the smb.conf(5) manpage before enabling. # If you are using encrypted passwords, Samba will need to know what # password database type you are using. # This boolean parameter controls whether Samba attempts to sync the Unix # password with the SMB password when the encrypted SMB password in the # passdb is changed. # For Unix password sync to work on a Debian GNU/Linux system, the following # parameters must be set (thanks to Ian Kahan <<[email protected]> for # sending the correct chat script for the passwd program in Debian Sarge). # This boolean controls whether PAM will be used for password changes # when requested by an SMB client instead of the program listed in # 'passwd program'. The default is 'no'. # This option controls how unsuccessful authentication attempts are mapped # to anonymous connections ########## Domains ########### # Is this machine able to authenticate users. Both PDC and BDC # must have this setting enabled. If you are the BDC you must # change the 'domain master' setting to no # ; domain logons = yes # # The following setting only takes effect if 'domain logons' is set # It specifies the location of the user's profile directory # from the client point of view) # The following required a [profiles] share to be setup on the # samba server (see below) ; logon path = \\%N\profiles\%U # Another common choice is storing the profile in the user's home directory # (this is Samba's default) # logon path = \\%N\%U\profile # The following setting only takes effect if 'domain logons' is set # It specifies the location of a user's home directory (from the client # point of view) ; logon drive = H: # logon home = \\%N\%U # The following setting only takes effect if 'domain logons' is set # It specifies the script to run during logon. The script must be stored # in the [netlogon] share # NOTE: Must be store in 'DOS' file format convention ; logon script = logon.cmd # This allows Unix users to be created on the domain controller via the SAMR # RPC pipe. The example command creates a user account with a disabled Unix # password; please adapt to your needs ; add user script = /usr/sbin/adduser --quiet --disabled-password --gecos "" %u # This allows machine accounts to be created on the domain controller via the # SAMR RPC pipe. # The following assumes a "machines" group exists on the system ; add machine script = /usr/sbin/useradd -g machines -c "%u machine account" -d /var/lib/samba -s /bin/false %u # This allows Unix groups to be created on the domain controller via the SAMR # RPC pipe. ; add group script = /usr/sbin/addgroup --force-badname %g ########## Printing ########## # If you want to automatically load your printer list rather # than setting them up individually then you'll need this # load printers = yes # lpr(ng) printing. You may wish to override the location of the # printcap file ; printing = bsd ; printcap name = /etc/printcap # CUPS printing. See also the cupsaddsmb(8) manpage in the # cupsys-client package. ; printing = cups ; printcap name = cups ############ Misc ############ # Using the following line enables you to customise your configuration # on a per machine basis. The %m gets replaced with the netbios name # of the machine that is connecting ; include = /home/samba/etc/smb.conf.%m # Most people will find that this option gives better performance. # See smb.conf(5) and /usr/share/doc/samba-doc/htmldocs/Samba3-HOWTO/speed.html # for details # You may want to add the following on a Linux system: # SO_RCVBUF=8192 SO_SNDBUF=8192 # socket options = TCP_NODELAY # The following parameter is useful only if you have the linpopup package # installed. The samba maintainer and the linpopup maintainer are # working to ease installation and configuration of linpopup and samba. ; message command = /bin/sh -c '/usr/bin/linpopup "%f" "%m" %s; rm %s' & # Domain Master specifies Samba to be the Domain Master Browser. If this # machine will be configured as a BDC (a secondary logon server), you # must set this to 'no'; otherwise, the default behavior is recommended. # domain master = auto # Some defaults for winbind (make sure you're not using the ranges # for something else.) ; idmap uid = 10000-20000 ; idmap gid = 10000-20000 ; template shell = /bin/bash # The following was the default behaviour in sarge, # but samba upstream reverted the default because it might induce # performance issues in large organizations. # See Debian bug #368251 for some of the consequences of *not* # having this setting and smb.conf(5) for details. ; winbind enum groups = yes ; winbind enum users = yes # Setup usershare options to enable non-root users to share folders # with the net usershare command. # Maximum number of usershare. 0 (default) means that usershare is disabled. ; usershare max shares = 100 # Allow users who've been granted usershare privileges to create # public shares, not just authenticated ones #======================= Share Definitions ======================= # Un-comment the following (and tweak the other settings below to suit) # to enable the default home directory shares. This will share each # user's home director as \\server\username ;[homes] ; comment = Home Directories ; browseable = no # By default, the home directories are exported read-only. Change the # next parameter to 'no' if you want to be able to write to them. ; read only = yes # File creation mask is set to 0700 for security reasons. If you want to # create files with group=rw permissions, set next parameter to 0775. ; create mask = 0700 # Directory creation mask is set to 0700 for security reasons. If you want to # create dirs. with group=rw permissions, set next parameter to 0775. ; directory mask = 0700 # By default, \\server\username shares can be connected to by anyone # with access to the samba server. Un-comment the following parameter # to make sure that only "username" can connect to \\server\username # The following parameter makes sure that only "username" can connect # # This might need tweaking when using external authentication schemes ; valid users = %S # Un-comment the following and create the netlogon directory for Domain Logons # (you need to configure Samba to act as a domain controller too.) ;[netlogon] ; comment = Network Logon Service ; path = /home/samba/netlogon ; guest ok = yes ; read only = yes # Un-comment the following and create the profiles directory to store # users profiles (see the "logon path" option above) # (you need to configure Samba to act as a domain controller too.) # The path below should be writable by all users so that their # profile directory may be created the first time they log on ;[profiles] ; comment = Users profiles ; path = /home/samba/profiles ; guest ok = no ; browseable = no ; create mask = 0600 ; directory mask = 0700 [printers] comment = All Printers browseable = no path = /var/spool/samba printable = yes guest ok = no read only = yes create mask = 0700 # Windows clients look for this share name as a source of downloadable # printer drivers [print$] comment = Printer Drivers browseable = yes writeable = no path = /var/lib/samba/printers # Uncomment to allow remote administration of Windows print drivers. # You may need to replace 'lpadmin' with the name of the group your # admin users are members of. # Please note that you also need to set appropriate Unix permissions # to the drivers directory for these users to have write rights in it ; write list = root, @lpadmin # A sample share for sharing your CD-ROM with others. ;[cdrom] ; comment = Samba server's CD-ROM ; read only = yes ; locking = no ; path = /cdrom ; guest ok = yes # The next two parameters show how to auto-mount a CD-ROM when the # cdrom share is accesed. For this to work /etc/fstab must contain # an entry like this: # # /dev/scd0 /cdrom iso9660 defaults,noauto,ro,user 0 0 # # The CD-ROM gets unmounted automatically after the connection to the # # If you don't want to use auto-mounting/unmounting make sure the CD # is mounted on /cdrom # ; preexec = /bin/mount /cdrom ; postexec = /bin/umount /cdrom [mediafiles] path = /media/multimedia/

    Read the article

  • CodePlex Daily Summary for Saturday, February 05, 2011

    CodePlex Daily Summary for Saturday, February 05, 2011Popular ReleasesNuclex Framework: R1323: This release is a pure XNA 4.0 release that no longer includes any XNA 3.1 binaries or projects. All x86 assemblies have been compiled targeting the .NET 4.0 Client Profile. Requires either Visual C# 2010 Express or Visual Studio 2010, both with XNA Game Studio 4.0. 3rd party libraries needed to compile and run the source code are included, so everything will compile out of the box. Changes: - Thanks to a generous contribution by Adrian Tsai, the TrueType importer now accepts standard Windo...Community Forums NNTP bridge: Community Forums NNTP Bridge V43: Release of the Community Forums NNTP Bridge to access the social and anwsers MS forums with a single, open source NNTP bridge. This release has added some features / bugfixes: Bugfix: Now supporting multi-line headers in all headers ;) / Thanks to Kai Schätzl for reporting this! Debug output optimized / Added a "Copy to clipboard" button in the debug windowFacebook C# SDK: 5.0.2 (BETA): PLEASE TAKE A FEW MINUTES TO GIVE US SOME FEEDBACK: Facebook C# SDK Survey This is third BETA release of the version 5 branch of the Facebook C# SDK. Remember this is a BETA build. Some things may change or not work exactly as planned. We are absolutely looking for feedback on this release to help us improve the final 5.X.X release. This release contains some breaking changes. Particularly with authentication. After spending time reviewing the trouble areas that people are having using th...ASP.NET MVC SiteMap provider: MvcSiteMapProvider 3.0.0 for MVC3: Using NuGet?MvcSiteMapProvider is also listed in the NuGet feed. Learn more... Like the project? Consider a donation!Donate via PayPal via PayPal. ChangelogTargeting ASP.NET MVC 3 and .NET 4.0 Additional UpdatePriority options for generating XML sitemaps Allow to specify target on SiteMapTitleAttribute One action with multiple routes and breadcrumbs Medium Trust optimizations Create SiteMapTitleAttribute for setting parent title IntelliSense for your sitemap with MvcSiteMapSchem...Rawr: Rawr 4.0.18 Beta: Rawr is now web-based. The link to use Rawr4 is: http://elitistjerks.com/rawr.phpThis is the Cataclysm Beta Release. More details can be found at the following link http://rawr.codeplex.com/Thread/View.aspx?ThreadId=237262 As of the 4.0.16 release, you can now also begin using the new Downloadable WPF version of Rawr!This is a pre-alpha release of the WPF version, there are likely to be a lot of issues. If you have a problem, please follow the Posting Guidelines and put it into the Issue Trac...ArcGIS Editor for OpenStreetMap: ArcGIS Editor for OpenStreetMap 1.1 beta3: This is the beta3 release for the ArcGIS Editor for OpenStreetMap version 1.1. Bug fixes in beta3: make the user interface for editing attributes keyboard friendly make the geoprocessing tools available for Python scripting (incl. sample scripts in the tool documentation) change in the logic for sending updates to the OpenStreetMap server updates to point symbology for the feature templates Changes from version 1.0: Multi-part geometries are now supported. Homogeneous relations (consi...patterns & practices SharePoint Guidance: SharePoint Guidance 2010 Hands On Lab: SharePoint Guidance 2010 Hands On Lab consists of six labs: one for logging, one for service location, and four for application setting manager. Each lab takes about 20 minutes to walk through. Each lab consists of a PDF document. You can go through the steps in the doc to create solution and then build/deploy the solution and run the lab. For those of you who wants to save the time, we included the final solution so you can just build/deploy the solution and run the lab.Mobile Device Detection and Redirection: 0.1.11.11: Improvements to Beta Release The following changes have been made in version 0.1.11.11: BlackBerry Version 6 devices (such as the 9800 Torch) are now correctly identified with a dedicated handler. Android powered devices are now correctly identified. Minor change to Provider.cs to improve performance and optimise data sent to 51Degrees.mobi if the option is enabled. GC.collect is no longer called at any point. All garbage collection now happens automatically IMPORTANT CHANGES This rele...TweetSharp: TweetSharp v2.0.0.0 - Preview 10: Documentation for this release may be found at http://tweetsharp.codeplex.com/wikipage?title=UserGuide&referringTitle=Documentation. Note: This code is currently preview quality. Preview 9 ChangesAdded support for trends Added support for Silverlight 4 Elevated WP7 fixes Third Party Library VersionsHammock v1.1.7: http://hammock.codeplex.com Json.NET 4.0 Release 1: http://json.codeplex.comFacebook Graph Toolkit: Facebook Graph Toolkit 0.7: Version 0.7 updates (2 Feb 2011)new Facebook Graph objects: Link, Note, StatusMessage new publish features: status update, post with link attachment new Graph Api connections in User object: statuses, links, notes internal code path improvement on Api object bug fixed: extra "r" character appears for strings with "\r" symbols in Json Objects bug fixed: error when performing Postback to the same page Tutorial and documentation available at http://fbgraph.computerbeacon.netHammock for REST: Hammock v1.1.7: v1.1.7 ChangesAdded support for cookies Added support for custom Content-Disposition types Fixes based on user feedback Supported Platforms.NET 2.0 .NET 3.5 SP1 and .NET 3.5 Client Profile .NET 4.0 and .NET 4.0 Client Profile Windows Phone 7 Silverlight 3 and 4 Mono 2.6 (See Mono and HTTPS)Phalanger - The PHP Language Compiler for the .NET Framework: 2.0 (February 2011): Next release of Phalanger; again faster, more stable and ready for daily use. Based on many user experiences this release is one more step closer to be perfect compiler and runtime of your old PHP applications; or perfect platform for migrating to .NET. February 2011 release of Phalanger introduces several changes, enhancements and fixes. See complete changelist for all the changes. To improve the performance of your application using MySQL, please use Managed MySQL Extension for Phalanger....Chemistry Add-in for Word: Chemistry Add-in for Word - Version 1.0: On February 1, 2011, we announced the availability of version 1 of the Chemistry Add-in for Word, as well as the assignment of the open source project to the Outercurve Foundation by Microsoft Research and the University of Cambridge. System RequirementsHardware RequirementsAny computer that can run Office 2007 or Office 2010. Software RequirementsYour computer must have the following software: Any version of Windows that can run Office 2007 or Office 2010, which includes Windows XP SP3 and...Minemapper: Minemapper v0.1.4: Updated mcmap, now supports new block types. Added a Worlds->'View Cache Folder' menu item.StyleCop for ReSharper: StyleCop for ReSharper 5.1.15005.000: Applied patch from rodpl for merging of stylecop setting files with settings in parent folder. Previous release: A considerable amount of work has gone into this release: Huge focus on performance around the violation scanning subsystem: - caching added to reduce IO operations around reading and merging of settings files - caching added to reduce creation of expensive objects Users should notice condsiderable perf boost and a decrease in memory usage. Bug Fixes: - StyleCop's new Objec...Minecraft Tools: Minecraft Topographical Survey 1.4: MTS requires version 4 of the .NET Framework - you must download it from Microsoft if you have not previously installed it. This version of MTS adds MCRegion support and fixes bugs that caused rendering to fail for some users. New in this version of MTS: Support for rendering worlds compressed with MCRegion Fixed rendering failure when encountering non-NBT files with the .dat extension Fixed rendering failure when encountering corrupt NBT files Minor GUI updates Note that the command...MVC Controls Toolkit: Mvc Controls Toolkit 0.8: Fixed the following bugs: *Variable name error in the jvascript file that prevented the use of the deleted item template of the Datagrid *Now after the changes applied to an item of the DataGrid are cancelled all input fields are reset to the very initial value they had. *Other minor bugs. Added: *This version is available both for MVC2, and MVC 3. The MVC 3 version has a release number of 0.85. This way one can install both version. *Client Validation support has been added to all control...Office Web.UI: Beta preview (Source): This is the first Beta. it includes full source code and all available controls. Some designers are not ready, and some features are not finalized allready (missing properties, draft styles) ThanksASP.net Ribbon: Version 2.2: This release brings some new controls (part of Office Web.UI). A few bugs are fixed and it includes the "auto resize" feature as you resize the window. (It can cause an infinite loop when the window is too reduced, it's why this release is not marked as "stable"). I will release more versions 2.3, 2.4... until V3 which will be the official launch of Office Web.UI. Both products will evolve at the same speed. Thanks.xUnit.net - Unit Testing for .NET: xUnit.net 1.7: xUnit.net release 1.7Build #1540 Important notes for Resharper users: Resharper support has been moved to the xUnit.net Contrib project. Important note for TestDriven.net users: If you are having issues running xUnit.net tests in TestDriven.net, especially on 64-bit Windows, we strongly recommend you upgrade to TD.NET version 3.0 or later. This release adds the following new features: Added support for ASP.NET MVC 3 Added Assert.Equal(double expected, double actual, int precision) Ad...New Projects.NET Micro Framework PTP library: .NET Micro Framework PTP library is implementation of Picture Transfer Protocol for .NET Micro Framework. It's developed in C# language. This library allows microcontroller with .NET Micro Framework to communicate with digital cameras. Asp.net learning: asp.net learningbrainydexter demos: Demos I have developed over time to showcase different techniques, ranging from graphics/opengl to crazy language specific (C++/C#) techniquesBrickFramework: BrickFrameworkCodecoFW-SL: CodecoFW-SL é um Framework desenvolvido em C# para trabalhar com Silverlight. Contem alguns controles e extensões para ajudar o desenvolvimento com Silverlight.Csharp Learning: My C # Learning examplejigsby: personal code dumpJuego de la Vida: Crearas vida con el mouseLogon Screen Launcher: Allows you to run applications at the Windows (XP/Vista/7) logon screen (Ctrl+Alt+Del) on system events, including logon/logoff, screen lock/unlock and startup/shutdown.MEF Silverlight Control Extensions: The Mef Silverlight Control Extensions gives you a declarative way of implement control importing using MEF.Membership, Roles and Profile Library (MRPLibrary): This project provides a simple abstraction for the Membership, Roles and ProfileManager ASP.NET providers as well as ASP.NET FormsAuthentication. The library creates required database objects automatically and uses web.config Membership, Roles and ProfileManager sections.Netpad: Basic .Net based text document editorOrchard Jumpstart: A jumpstart Orchard module, implementing basic module functionality. Created to make Orchard module creation a bit quicker:)Orchard Rewrite Rules: Orchard module to add rewrite rules to your website using Apache .htaccess file format.Outlook Social Connectors: The Outlook Social Connectors project was started as a 24 Hour Challenge Project. The project has several Outlook Social Connectors (Twitter, Fogbugz, ...) and aims to provide a framework for developing new connectors.Rail.Net: Small rail net application For rail analysisregistrudecasa: registrudecasaRelDB: A true relational database management system compatible with Tutorial D.RTP Tooltip: This DNN module instantiates an instance of DNNToolTipManager and allows you to enter a list of ClientIDs to TooltipifySSIS Report Generator Task (Custom Control Flow Component): SSIS Report Generator Task (Custom Control Flow Component)The Ministry of Technology Framework Extensions: The aim of the MOT Framework extensions project is to offer a variety of solutions for common 'boilerplate' development requirements and speed up the development process. Ongoing discussions and information on the library is posted up to http://www.theministryoftechnology.co.ukWindowsPhone 7 Live Soccer Scores: An Windows Phone 7 app which displays the live soccer scores from the Dutch eredivisie, English premier league, Champions league and Europa league.Wolfram Alpha Api 2.0: 20 january 2011 open new version of wolfram alpha api, version 2.0. This project will help you to work with the new api. Knowledge is power!Wurfl 51degrees Mobile Capabilities Viewer: A Web App to display all the Mobile Capabilities for a given user Agent, uses 51degrees.Codeplex.com .Net dll and Wurfl device files. The current sample in the downloads section of [http://51degrees.codeplex.com] doesnt display all Browser and Wurfl Capabilities for a UserAgent.XNA Command Console (XNACC): XNACC is a component that adds an interactive command console to your XNA project. It supports many built-in commands, as well as custom commands, key bindings, simple functions (macros), console variables and can use functions in external assemblies. Implemented in C#/VS2010.Xteq5: Xteq5 is an (hopefully) easy to use open source Windows computer management solution to get the job done.ZipArchiveReader: ZipLib is a ZIP file reader. It provides a simple way to read and write .zip files. The purpose of ZipLib is give ZIP file capabilities to ASP.Net applications which were granted minimum permissions. It can be a partial trust DLL that can run in Internet Zone and probably ...

    Read the article

  • Windows Azure: Announcing release of Windows Azure SDK 2.2 (with lots of goodies)

    - by ScottGu
    Earlier today I blogged about a big update we made today to Windows Azure, and some of the great new features it provides. Today I’m also excited to also announce the release of the Windows Azure SDK 2.2. Today’s SDK release adds even more great features including: Visual Studio 2013 Support Integrated Windows Azure Sign-In support within Visual Studio Remote Debugging Cloud Services with Visual Studio Firewall Management support within Visual Studio for SQL Databases Visual Studio 2013 RTM VM Images for MSDN Subscribers Windows Azure Management Libraries for .NET Updated Windows Azure PowerShell Cmdlets and ScriptCenter The below post has more details on what’s available in today’s Windows Azure SDK 2.2 release.  Also head over to Channel 9 to see the new episode of the Visual Studio Toolbox show that will be available shortly, and which highlights these features in a video demonstration. Visual Studio 2013 Support Version 2.2 of the Window Azure SDK is the first official version of the SDK to support the final RTM release of Visual Studio 2013. If you installed the 2.1 SDK with the Preview of Visual Studio 2013 we recommend that you upgrade your projects to SDK 2.2.  SDK 2.2 also works side by side with the SDK 2.0 and SDK 2.1 releases on Visual Studio 2012: Integrated Windows Azure Sign In within Visual Studio Integrated Windows Azure Sign-In support within Visual Studio is one of the big improvements added with this Windows Azure SDK release.  Integrated sign-in support enables developers to develop/test/manage Windows Azure resources within Visual Studio without having to download or use management certificates.  You can now just right-click on the “Windows Azure” icon within the Server Explorer inside Visual Studio and choose the “Connect to Windows Azure” context menu option to connect to Windows Azure: Doing this will prompt you to enter the email address of the account you wish to sign-in with: You can use either a Microsoft Account (e.g. Windows Live ID) or an Organizational account (e.g. Active Directory) as the email.  The dialog will update with an appropriate login prompt depending on which type of email address you enter: Once you sign-in you’ll see the Windows Azure resources that you have permissions to manage show up automatically within the Visual Studio Server Explorer (and you can start using them): With this new integrated sign in experience you are now able to publish web apps, deploy VMs and cloud services, use Windows Azure diagnostics, and fully interact with your Windows Azure services within Visual Studio without the need for a management certificate.  All of the authentication is handled using the Windows Azure Active Directory associated with your Windows Azure account (details on this can be found in my earlier blog post). Integrating authentication this way end-to-end across the Service Management APIs + Dev Tools + Management Portal + PowerShell automation scripts enables a much more secure and flexible security model within Windows Azure, and makes it much more convenient to securely manage multiple developers + administrators working on a project.  It also allows organizations and enterprises to use the same authentication model that they use for their developers on-premises in the cloud.  It also ensures that employees who leave an organization immediately lose access to their company’s cloud based resources once their Active Directory account is suspended. Filtering/Subscription Management Once you login within Visual Studio, you can filter which Windows Azure subscriptions/regions are visible within the Server Explorer by right-clicking the “Filter Services” context menu within the Server Explorer.  You can also use the “Manage Subscriptions” context menu to mange your Windows Azure Subscriptions: Bringing up the “Manage Subscriptions” dialog allows you to see which accounts you are currently using, as well as which subscriptions are within them: The “Certificates” tab allows you to continue to import and use management certificates to manage Windows Azure resources as well.  We have not removed any functionality with today’s update – all of the existing scenarios that previously supported management certificates within Visual Studio continue to work just fine.  The new integrated sign-in support provided with today’s release is purely additive. Note: the SQL Database node and the Mobile Service node in Server Explorer do not support integrated sign-in at this time. Therefore, you will only see databases and mobile services under those nodes if you have a management certificate to authorize access to them.  We will enable them with integrated sign-in in a future update. Remote Debugging Cloud Resources within Visual Studio Today’s Windows Azure SDK 2.2 release adds support for remote debugging many types of Windows Azure resources. With live, remote debugging support from within Visual Studio, you are now able to have more visibility than ever before into how your code is operating live in Windows Azure.  Let’s walkthrough how to enable remote debugging for a Cloud Service: Remote Debugging of Cloud Services To enable remote debugging for your cloud service, select Debug as the Build Configuration on the Common Settings tab of your Cloud Service’s publish dialog wizard: Then click the Advanced Settings tab and check the Enable Remote Debugging for all roles checkbox: Once your cloud service is published and running live in the cloud, simply set a breakpoint in your local source code: Then use Visual Studio’s Server Explorer to select the Cloud Service instance deployed in the cloud, and then use the Attach Debugger context menu on the role or to a specific VM instance of it: Once the debugger attaches to the Cloud Service, and a breakpoint is hit, you’ll be able to use the rich debugging capabilities of Visual Studio to debug the cloud instance remotely, in real-time, and see exactly how your app is running in the cloud. Today’s remote debugging support is super powerful, and makes it much easier to develop and test applications for the cloud.  Support for remote debugging Cloud Services is available as of today, and we’ll also enable support for remote debugging Web Sites shortly. Firewall Management Support with SQL Databases By default we enable a security firewall around SQL Databases hosted within Windows Azure.  This ensures that only your application (or IP addresses you approve) can connect to them and helps make your infrastructure secure by default.  This is great for protection at runtime, but can sometimes be a pain at development time (since by default you can’t connect/manage the database remotely within Visual Studio if the security firewall blocks your instance of VS from connecting to it). One of the cool features we’ve added with today’s release is support that makes it easy to enable and configure the security firewall directly within Visual Studio.  Now with the SDK 2.2 release, when you try and connect to a SQL Database using the Visual Studio Server Explorer, and a firewall rule prevents access to the database from your machine, you will be prompted to add a firewall rule to enable access from your local IP address: You can simply click Add Firewall Rule and a new rule will be automatically added for you. In some cases, the logic to detect your local IP may not be sufficient (for example: you are behind a corporate firewall that uses a range of IP addresses) and you may need to set up a firewall rule for a range of IP addresses in order to gain access. The new Add Firewall Rule dialog also makes this easy to do.  Once connected you’ll be able to manage your SQL Database directly within the Visual Studio Server Explorer: This makes it much easier to work with databases in the cloud. Visual Studio 2013 RTM Virtual Machine Images Available for MSDN Subscribers Last week we released the General Availability Release of Visual Studio 2013 to the web.  This is an awesome release with a ton of new features. With today’s Windows Azure update we now have a set of pre-configured VM images of VS 2013 available within the Windows Azure Management Portal for use by MSDN customers.  This enables you to create a VM in the cloud with VS 2013 pre-installed on it in with only a few clicks: Windows Azure now provides the fastest and easiest way to get started doing development with Visual Studio 2013. Windows Azure Management Libraries for .NET (Preview) Having the ability to automate the creation, deployment, and tear down of resources is a key requirement for applications running in the cloud.  It also helps immensely when running dev/test scenarios and coded UI tests against pre-production environments. Today we are releasing a preview of a new set of Windows Azure Management Libraries for .NET.  These new libraries make it easy to automate tasks using any .NET language (e.g. C#, VB, F#, etc).  Previously this automation capability was only available through the Windows Azure PowerShell Cmdlets or to developers who were willing to write their own wrappers for the Windows Azure Service Management REST API. Modern .NET Developer Experience We’ve worked to design easy-to-understand .NET APIs that still map well to the underlying REST endpoints, making sure to use and expose the modern .NET functionality that developers expect today: Portable Class Library (PCL) support targeting applications built for any .NET Platform (no platform restriction) Shipped as a set of focused NuGet packages with minimal dependencies to simplify versioning Support async/await task based asynchrony (with easy sync overloads) Shared infrastructure for common error handling, tracing, configuration, HTTP pipeline manipulation, etc. Factored for easy testability and mocking Built on top of popular libraries like HttpClient and Json.NET Below is a list of a few of the management client classes that are shipping with today’s initial preview release: .NET Class Name Supports Operations for these Assets (and potentially more) ManagementClient Locations Credentials Subscriptions Certificates ComputeManagementClient Hosted Services Deployments Virtual Machines Virtual Machine Images & Disks StorageManagementClient Storage Accounts WebSiteManagementClient Web Sites Web Site Publish Profiles Usage Metrics Repositories VirtualNetworkManagementClient Networks Gateways Automating Creating a Virtual Machine using .NET Let’s walkthrough an example of how we can use the new Windows Azure Management Libraries for .NET to fully automate creating a Virtual Machine. I’m deliberately showing a scenario with a lot of custom options configured – including VHD image gallery enumeration, attaching data drives, network endpoints + firewall rules setup - to show off the full power and richness of what the new library provides. We’ll begin with some code that demonstrates how to enumerate through the built-in Windows images within the standard Windows Azure VM Gallery.  We’ll search for the first VM image that has the word “Windows” in it and use that as our base image to build the VM from.  We’ll then create a cloud service container in the West US region to host it within: We can then customize some options on it such as setting up a computer name, admin username/password, and hostname.  We’ll also open up a remote desktop (RDP) endpoint through its security firewall: We’ll then specify the VHD host and data drives that we want to mount on the Virtual Machine, and specify the size of the VM we want to run it in: Once everything has been set up the call to create the virtual machine is executed asynchronously In a few minutes we’ll then have a completely deployed VM running on Windows Azure with all of the settings (hard drives, VM size, machine name, username/password, network endpoints + firewall settings) fully configured and ready for us to use: Preview Availability via NuGet The Windows Azure Management Libraries for .NET are now available via NuGet. Because they are still in preview form, you’ll need to add the –IncludePrerelease switch when you go to retrieve the packages. The Package Manager Console screen shot below demonstrates how to get the entire set of libraries to manage your Windows Azure assets: You can also install them within your .NET projects by right clicking on the VS Solution Explorer and using the Manage NuGet Packages context menu command.  Make sure to select the “Include Prerelease” drop-down for them to show up, and then you can install the specific management libraries you need for your particular scenarios: Open Source License The new Windows Azure Management Libraries for .NET make it super easy to automate management operations within Windows Azure – whether they are for Virtual Machines, Cloud Services, Storage Accounts, Web Sites, and more.  Like the rest of the Windows Azure SDK, we are releasing the source code under an open source (Apache 2) license and it is hosted at https://github.com/WindowsAzure/azure-sdk-for-net/tree/master/libraries if you wish to contribute. PowerShell Enhancements and our New Script Center Today, we are also shipping Windows Azure PowerShell 0.7.0 (which is a separate download). You can find the full change log here. Here are some of the improvements provided with it: Windows Azure Active Directory authentication support Script Center providing many sample scripts to automate common tasks on Windows Azure New cmdlets for Media Services and SQL Database Script Center Windows Azure enables you to script and automate a lot of tasks using PowerShell.  People often ask for more pre-built samples of common scenarios so that they can use them to learn and tweak/customize. With this in mind, we are excited to introduce a new Script Center that we are launching for Windows Azure. You can learn about how to scripting with Windows Azure with a get started article. You can then find many sample scripts across different solutions, including infrastructure, data management, web, and more: All of the sample scripts are hosted on TechNet with links from the Windows Azure Script Center. Each script is complete with good code comments, detailed descriptions, and examples of usage. Summary Visual Studio 2013 and the Windows Azure SDK 2.2 make it easier than ever to get started developing rich cloud applications. Along with the Windows Azure Developer Center’s growing set of .NET developer resources to guide your development efforts, today’s Windows Azure SDK 2.2 release should make your development experience more enjoyable and efficient. If you don’t already have a Windows Azure account, you can sign-up for a free trial and start using all of the above features today.  Then visit the Windows Azure Developer Center to learn more about how to build apps with it. Hope this helps, Scott P.S. In addition to blogging, I am also now using Twitter for quick updates and to share links. Follow me at: twitter.com/scottgu

    Read the article

< Previous Page | 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407  | Next Page >